Kwizbot grammar

Using El Preterito Perfecto de Subjuntivo after esperar que to express a completed action in the future

"Esperar que..." (to hope that...) can be followed by El Pretérito Perfecto del Subjuntivo to express the hope that something will have happened, as a completed action in the future. Read and listen to these examples: Espero que hayas tomado tu decisión antes de la fecha acordada. - I hope you will have made your decision by/before the agreed date. Esperamos que hayáis encontrado lo que buscáis para entonces. - We hope you will have found what you're looking for by then. Ella espera que yo ya haya cobrado el lunes próximo. - She hopes I will have been paid by next Monday. You will generally find a future reference in these sentences (unless it has been mentioned before and it is omitted.) Future references in the examples above: "para entonces" (by then) "antes de la fecha acordada" (before the agreed date) "el lunes próximo" (next Monday) The action that is hoped to have been finished/achieved is an action completed within that future reference.

Forming El Pretérito Indefinido progresivo with estar + gerundio (past progressive)

Each Spanish past tense has a continuous (progressive) form to express an action which was ongoing in the past. In the case of El pretérito Indefinido progresivo, it follows this pattern for most regular verbs: Estar in El Pretérito Indefinido + -ando (-AR verbs) -iendo (-ER and -IR verbs) It is very similar to the English past continuous. Look at and listen to these examples: Yo estuve caminando durante 4 horas.I was walking for 4 hours. Tú estuviste corrigiendo exámenes hasta las diez.You were marking exams until ten. Ella estuvo bailando con ese chico toda la noche.She was dancing with that guy all night. Nosotros estuvimos hablando con los periodistas.We were talking to the journalists. Vosotros estuvisteis merendando en el parque por la tarde.You were having a snack at the park in the afternoon. Ellos estuvieron arreglando el grifo de la cocina.They were fixing the tap in the kitchen.

How to use "un tanto/algo + adjective"

"Un tanto" is an adverb that can be used with adjectives to indicate "a bit/slightly/somewhat [+ adjective]". It is a synonym of the more commonly used "un poco..." Here are some examples: No quiero entrar ahí; parece un lugar un tanto siniestro.I don't want to get in there; it seems like a bit of a sinister place. Me gusta mi clase pero algunos estudiantes son un tanto revoltosos.I like my class but some some students are a bit unruly. Marcos conduce un tanto rápido y no quiero que me lleve a casa.Marcos drives a bit fast and I don't want him to take me home. La fiesta se puso un tanto animada después de medianoche.The party became somewhat lively after midnight. The word "algo" can also be used to express the same concept:a bit/slightly, for example: Mi hija es algo callada pero muy trabajadora.My daughter is a bit shy/quiet but very hardworking. Aunque la película es algo lenta, merece la pena verla.Although the film is slightly slow, it is worth watching. Estamos algo cansados, así que nos iremos directamente a la cama.We're somewhat tired, so we'll go straight to bed. Don't get confused with "tanto" when it's used as an indefinite adjective expressing so much, so many; when we use "un tanto" this is not an adjective but an invariable adverb expressing a "small quantity". Careful! The adjectives that accompany "un tanto" or "algo" still need to agree with the noun they modify: Los azulejos están un tanto/algo desnivelados.The tiles are slightly uneven.

Forming singular and plural of adjectives ending in -ar

All Spanish adjectives that end in -ar have the same form for masculine and feminine singular. Have a look and listen to these examples: Un chico ejemplar. - A model boy. Una chica ejemplar. - A model girl. To form the masculine and feminine plurals of these adjectives that end in -ar add -es: Unas mesas circulares - Some circular tables. Unos pendientes circulares. - Some circular earrings. Las minifaldas eran populares en los años 60. - Miniskirts were popular in the sixties

Quien / Quienes: relative pronouns

Always refers to people, never things. Quien / Quienes have singular plural form, but there is never distinction with gender. Can only mean who. e.g Mi vecina Clara, quien es peluquera, tiene su propio salón de belleza. - My neighbour Clara, who is a hairdresser, has her own beauty salon. Mis vecinos, quienes tienen tres hijos, son muy ruidosos. - My neighbours, who have three children, are very noisy.

What is an Indirect Object Pronoun

An indirect object pronoun (un pronombre de objeto indirecto) tells you to whom or for whom something is done.

Preposition 'por' y 'para' + Pronoun

Antonio lo ha hecho por mí. - Antonio has done it for me. Para ti es muy fácil todo. - For you everything is easy. Ellos se preocupan mucho por nosotros. - They worry a lot about us. Para vosotras todo esto es una broma. - For you [plural] all this is a joke.

Aunque + El Presente vs El Presente de Subjuntivo

Aunque, generally translated as although, even if, or despite, can be used with the indicative and the subjunctive. Using one or the other will depend on what we want to express. In this lesson we will study cases of: aunque + El Presente aunque + El Presente de Subjuntivo Use aunque + El Presente: To announce something that what we know is happening. It is a fact. The speaker has absolutely no doubt that what he is saying is true. It also implies that the speaker considers this information as new for the listener. He wants to make sure the listener is aware. Voy a salir aunque llueve mucho. - I am going out despite the rain. Here the speaker is using the present indicative because he may have looked through the window and checked that it is actually raining. There is no doubt about it. In addition, he is informing the listener about this in case he didn't notice. Use aunque + El Presente de Subjuntivo 1. To give some background information which is known by the speaker and the listener. It is a shared information. Voy a salir aunque llueva mucho. - I am going out although it is raining. Here the speaker and the listener know already that it is raining, maybe because they've just come from outside, or they are looking through the window and they can see the rain. 2. To refer to something that may/may not happen later, in the future. Voy a salir después aunque llueva mucho. - I am going out later even if it rains. Here the speaker doesn't know whether it will rain or not later but it may rain, maybe because he can see a grey sky and there is a possibility of rain later. Aunque París es una ciudad impresionante, prefiero Londres. - Although Paris is an astonishing city, I prefer London. Aunque me duele la cabeza, voy a seguir trabajando. - Even though I have a headache, I am going to keep on working. Aunque París sea una ciudad impresionante, prefiero Londres. - Even though Paris is an astonishing city, I prefer London. Aunque me duela la cabeza, voy a seguir trabajando. - Although I have a headache, I am going to keep on working. Aunque me supliques no me casaré contigo. - Even if you beg me I won't marry you. No irás a ese viaje aunque consigas el dinero. - You will not go on that trip even if you get the money. Bear in mind that sometimes it is difficult to know whether the speaker is using the subjunctive to convey a future idea or a shared information. Have a look again at this example: Aunque esté nevando, voy a sacar al perro a pasear. There are two possibilities here: the speaker is thinking that it might snow later (but even so, nonetheless, he is taking the dog for a walk) the speaker and the listener both know that it is snowing at that moment of speaking (but even so / nonethelesss, he is going to take the dog for a walk), so it is a background/shared information.

Cuando + El Presente de Subjuntivo vs Cuando + El Presente de Indicativo

Cuando (When) is followed by a verb in the subjunctive mood to express a future event still to happen. e.g Cuando sea mayor, seré médico. - When I am older, I will be a doctor. Cuando vayas al mercado compra fruta y verdura. - When you go to the market, buy fruit and vegetables. Cuando estemos de vacaciones no usaré el móvil. - When we are on holidays I won't use the mobile phone. Note: Cuando can be followed by either the indicative or subjunctive. El Presente de Indicativo expresses that something actually happens. See these two similar examples, one with indicative and one with subjunctive: In this sentence the going on holidays to Tenerife really happens. Cuando voy de vacaciones a Tenerife me hospedo en el hotel Olimpia. - When I go on holiday to Tenerife I stay at the hotel Olimpia. In this next sentence the going on holidays to Tenerife has not happened. It is a future idea. Notice that the future tense follows the subjunctive here. Cuando vaya de vacaciones a Tenerife me hospedaré en el hotel Olimpia. - When I [will] go on holiday to Tenerife I will stay at the hotel Olimpia.

Using demonstrative adjectives to refer to time (present, past and future)

Demonstrative adjectives are usually used as spatial references, but they can also be used to establish temporal references in order to refer to the present, the past and the future. Este/esta/estos/estas Esta semana no ha parado de llover.It hasn't stopped raining this week. Estos meses no dejará de aumentar el paro.In the coming months, unemployment will continue increasing. In the first example above, esta refers to present time (esta semana, i.e the current week) while in the second example, estos refers to a near future (estos meses, i.e the months coming). Ese/esa/esos/esas Ese día estaba muy enferma y no vine a trabajar.I was very sick that day and I didn't come to work. Recuerdo ese día como una ocasión muy especial.I remember that day as a very special occasion. ¿Tendrás más tiempo para ese día?Will you have more time that day? In the first and second examples above, ese día refers to a past event while in the third example ese día refers to a future event. Aquel/aquella/aquellos/aquellas ¡Qué tiempos aquellos en que no existían los móviles y se conversaba más!What an interesting time it was when mobile phones didn't exist and we talked more! ¡Qué semana aquella que pasamos en Ibiza!What a beautiful week we spent in Ibiza! We can only use aquel, aquella, aquellos and aquellas to refer to a past event. Very often this use indicates an element of nostalgia. We do not use it to refer to present or future events. In the examples above, aquel / aquella / aquellos / aquellas refer to a past event that is further away in the time in the speaker's mind compared to ese/esa/esos/esas. Have a look at these two examples to see the difference: ¡Qué buenos recuerdos tengo de ese viaje!What good memories I have of that journey! ¡Qué buenos recuerdos tengo de aquel viaje!What good memories I have of that journey! In the first sentence, the speaker feels "closer" in time to the journey while in the second sentence the speaker sees it as a more "far away" idea, yet they are both referring to the same journey. So, using ese or aquel is sometimes subjective.

Using El Condicional to talk about a future in the past

El Condicional Simple can be used in Spanish to express an action that takes place in a future within the past. It is commonly used in reported speech, with "Dijo que..." For example: Ella dijo que me llevaría a mi casaShe said she'd take me home. Mis padres dijeron que me comprarían un coche.My parents said that they'd buy me a car. If we place ourselves in the past at the moment of speaking, the action expressed with El Condicional is seen as something that has not happened yet, but it is going to happen in the future (inside that past). Thinking about it now, everything expressed in the sentence is completed in the past, but not back then at the moment of speaking. Sometimes the indirect speech is not obvious, or not present, but it has the same effect, as long as there is a verb in the past tense. For example: Todos llegamos a un acuerdo: no beberíamos nada de alcohol hasta diciembre.We all came to an agreement: we wouldn't drink any alcohol until December. Carmen decidió que ella pagaría las clases privadas de guitarra de su nieta.Carmen decided that she'd pay the private guitar lessons for her granddaughter. Bear in mind that sometimes the action expressed with the conditional may still not have happened yet, but it will happen in a future point after the moment of talking. For example: El hombre del tiempo dijo ayer que hoy llovería.The weather forecast presenter said yesterday that it would rain today. Here, the moment of speaking is "today" and we can understand that the action expressed in the conditional is an action either about to happen today or already happening. It is not clear, but it is understood that it will happen.

Using El Condicional Simple to express probability/speculation about the past

El Condicional Simple is used to express conjecture about the past. We use it to express what we think was probably happening/happened "back" in the past. Have a look at the following examples: If Person 1 says: Son las 11 de la mañana, y Antonio todavía está durmiendo. - It is 11 am, and Antonio is still sleeping. Person 2 might ask: ¿A qué hora llegaría a casa anoche? - What time did he get home last night? [I wonder what time he returned home last night?] Then Person 1 could reply: Yo creo que llegaría a casa sobre las 3 de la mañana. - I think he probably got home at about 3 in the morning. By using El Condicional Simple here, both speakers are speculating about what happened last night. They are not stating known facts, only what they think probably happened. To state known facts we use El Pretérito Indefinido and not El Condicional Simple: Llegó a las 3 de la mañana. - He arrived at 3 in the morning. Here are more examples using El Condicional Simple for the same purpose: ¿Cuándo saldría el tren? - When did the train leave? [I wonder what time the train left?] Serían las siete cuando terminó por fin la reunión. - It was probably seven o'clock when the meeting finally finished. Tendríamos diez años en esa foto. - We were probably ten years old in that photo. Cuando yo la vi por última vez, tendría unos 20 años. - When I last saw her, she was probably about 20 years old. SUMMARY: In Spanish you use El Condicional Simple to speculate about something that happened in the past, to express probability with regards to a past action. ATTENTION:If the conjecture or expression of probability is about the present, then you use El Futuro Simple.

Conjugate decir in El Pretérito Perfecto (present perfect)

El Pretérito Perfecto is used to express something that has happened or happened. The verb decir (to say/tell) is irregular in El Pretérito Perfecto: Haber in El Presente + dicho (past participle of decir) Yo he dicho la verdad. - I have told the truth. ¿Qué has dicho? - What did you say? ("you" = "tú" = singular informal) Juan ha dicho que sí. - Juan has said yes. Usted ha dicho una mentira. - You have told a lie. Nosotros hemos dicho que no. - We have said no. ¿Vosotros habéis dicho eso? - Did you say that? Mis padres no han dicho bien la frase. - My parents haven't pronounced the sentence correctly. Tus amigas han dicho muchas cosas. - Your friends have said many things.

Querer que and desear que are always followed by:

El subjuntivo. 'Querer que', to say to want [someone] to is always followed by the El Presente de Subjuntivo. This also holds for negative constructions and questions. e.g No quiero que me llames por teléfono. - I don't want you to phone me. ¿Qué quieres que haga? - What do you want me to do? Tus amigos quieren que seas más sociable. - Your friends want you to be more sociable. Note: the subject (yo, tú etc.) in the first and second part of the sentence are usually different. Take the last example: Tus amigos quieren que seas más sociable. - The subject of querer is tus amigos but the subject of ser más sociable is tú.

Using adverbial clauses para que, antes (de) que, hasta que, con tal (de) que, etc. + El Presente de Subjuntivo (present subjunctive)

Estoy ahorrando mucho dinero para que mis hijos puedan ir a la universidad. - I am saving a lot of money so that my children can go to the university. Antes de que me culpes, voy a explicarte lo que ha pasado realmente. - Before you blame me, I will explain what really happened. No vas a salir de casa hasta que recojas tu habitación. - You are not leaving the house until you tidy your room. No me importa si vienes más tarde con tal (de) que hagas bien tu trabajo. - I don't care if you come later provided that you do your work well. Adverbial clauses in Spanish are introduced by conjunctions, such as para que (so that), antes (de) que (before), hasta que (until), con tal (de) que (provided that), etc. The subjunctive mood is required in the adverbial clause in Spanish if the adverbial clause is considered as something hypothetical or anticipated—rather than completed, habitual, or factual. Other examples with adverbial constructions followed by El Subjuntivo: Puedes ir a la fiesta a condición de que no vuelvas muy tarde. - You can go to the party on the condition that you don't come back too late. Me marcharé a menos que me pidas que me quede contigo. - I will leave unless you ask me to stay with you. En caso de que tengas un problema, llámanos para ayudarte. - If you have a problem, call us in order to help you. No puedes hacer lo que quieres sin que ellos se enteren. - You can't do what you please without them noticing. Other adverbial clauses that require the subjunctive are: Siempre que... (As long as...) Contrataremos al nuevo profesor siempre que tengamos presupuesto. - We will hire the new teacher as long as we have the budget. Mientras (que...) (As long as...) Contrataremos al nuevo profesor mientras (que) tengamos presupuesto. - We will hire the new teacher as long as we have the budget. Aunque... (even if) Aunque me regales rosas no saldré contigo a cenar. - Even if you buy me roses I won't go out with you for dinner. Por más que... (No matter how much...) Por más que lo intente no puedo concentrarme. - No matter how much I try I can't concentrate. Por mucho que... (No matter how much...) Por mucho que lo intente no puedo concentrarme. - No matter how much I try I can't concentrate. Una vez que... (Once...) Te sentirás mejor en el trabajo una vez que conozcas a tus compañeros. - You will feel better at work once you get to know your colleagues. Cuando... (When...) Cuando vayas mañana al mercado, compra pescado para mi. - When you go to the market tomorrow, buy some fish for me.

When to use the perfect tense versus the simple past in European Spanish (Perfecto vs Indefinido)

European Spanish (Español peninsular) uses two different tenses to talk about past events in cases where in English we generally use one. Knowing whether to use El Pretérito Perfecto ("he ido") or El Pretérito Indefinido ("fui") can be tricky at first but it's actually pretty easy. The rules are simple once you understand how we think about units of time: days, weeks, months and years. Detailed explanation In English, we would use I went for all of these cases: I went to the doctor today.I went to the doctor yesterday.I went to the doctor this week.I went to the doctor last week.I went to the doctor this month. In Español peninsular, however, we choose either He ido or Fui according to when the action occurred relative to the "unit of time" referred to or implied (day, week, month, year): He ido al médico hoy. Fui al médico ayer. He ido al médico esta semana. Fui al médico la semana pasada. He ido al médico este mes. How to know when to use El Pretérito Perfecto or El Pretérito Indefinido The choice of tense depends on whether the speaker is "still inside" the "unit of time" that's being used or implied: Use El Pretérito Perfecto ("he ido") form when talking about the past:- today, this week, this month, or this year Use El Pretérito Indefinido ("fui") form when talking about the past:- yesterday, last week, last month, or last year (or further back) If we're expressing ourselves in blocks of days then "yesterday" is in the past relative to today and therefore requires "fui". If we're talking about exactly the same event but using the time block "this week," then that is still current because the event and the speaker are in the same time block, so the speaker uses "He ido". Easy! Attention: the smallest block of time is one day when considering which tense to use. Parts of the day, such as morning, afternoon, evening and night do not count as 'time blocks' for this purpose. For example, if it's now the afternoon, you still use "he ido" to say "I went" somewhere in the morning. Note: when we talk about things that happened hours or minutes ago, you can use either tense: Lo he visto/lo vi hace 2 minutos.I saw him two minutes ago. Lo he visto/ lo vi hace unas horas.I saw him a few hours ago. English is not so different You might think this concept of time blocks determining choice of tense is strange at first, but in fact, in English we use the perfect tense with the very same time blocks (albeit with a different nuance; i.e., to introduce a new fact or express a sense of continued action). These sentences sound right: I've been to the doctor today... (and she said...)I've been to the doctor this week/month/year... (twice/four times!) But these sound strange: I've been to the doctor yesterday.I've been to the doctor last week/month/year... They feel very strange because the time block is over. Spanish is the same: don't use El Pretérito Perfecto to talk about events in previous blocks of time. Use El Pretérito Perfecto instead. Caution: novices in both languages mistakenly translate El Pretérito Perfecto into/from the English present perfect because they share the same form:"I have [past participle]" is structurally the same as "(Yo) he + [past participle]" While there are instances where this will work, in general this is a mistake and the English preterite is the appropriate choice.

Indirect Object Pronouns:

First person: me (to/for me) nos (to/for us) Second person: te (to/for informal you) os (to/for informal you) Third person le (to/for it, him, her, formal you) les(to/for them, formal you)

Forming the imperative of vosotros for all verbs (affirmative commands)

For all verbs in Spanish there is just one way of forming the imperative (affirmative commands) of vosotros. Regardless of any irregularity that the verb might have in any other tense, the vosotros form of the imperative will always be formed this way: 1. Take the infinitive form of the verb (e.g hablar) 2. Drop the final -r (habla-) 3. Add -d (hablad) Have a look and listen to some examples of totally regular verbs: Hablar. ¡Hablad!To speak. Speak! (you plural) Comer. ¡Comed!To eat. Eat! (you plural) Vivir. ¡Vivid!To live. Live! (you plural) Have a look and listen to some examples of stem-changing verbs: Venir. ¡Venid!To come. Come! (you plural) Ir de compras. ¡Id de compras!To go shopping. Go shopping! (you plural) Volver temprano. ¡Volved temprano!To come back early. Come back early!

Imperfect versions of the verb GANAR

Ganar imperfect 1: ganara ganaras ganara ganáramos ganarais ganaran Ganar imperfect 2: ganase ganases ganase ganásemos ganaseis ganasen

Preposition 'hacia' + Pronoun

Hacia: towards Hay un gato negro que camina hacia mí. - There is a black cat that is walking towards me. El viento fuerte sopla hacia ti y es difícil caminar. - The strong wind is blowing towards you and it is difficult to walk. El policía fue hacia él y lo arrestó. - The policeman went towards him and arrested him.

Using El Imperfecto Subjuntivo in hypothetical clauses introduced by si followed by El Condicional Simple

Here's a hypothetical situation in English: If we won the lottery, we would buy a Ferrari. If we were to win the lottery, we would buy a Ferrari. Here you can see that if is followed by a verb in the Simple Past (won) or in the English subjunctive (were to win), while the second clause uses the Conditional Present (would buy). Now look at the Spanish: Si ganásemos la lotería, compraríamos un Ferrari. Here you see that in Spanish, si is followed by a verb in El Imperfecto Subjuntivo (ganásemos), while the second clause uses El Condicional Simple (compraríamos).Here are more examples: Si ganásemos la lotería, compraríamos un Ferrari.If we won the lottery, we would buy a Ferrari. Si yo tuviera más dinero, iría de vacaciones a Cuba. - If I had more money, I would go on holiday to Cuba. Si tú fueses más simpático, tendrías más amigos. - If you were nicer, you would have more friends. Si ella viniera ahora, comeríamos en ese restaurante. - If she came now, we would eat in that restaurant. Si nosotros estudiáramos para los exámenes, sacaríamos buenas notas. - If we studied for the exams, we would get good grades. Si vosotros trabajaseis allí, ganaríais mucho dinero. - If you worked there, you would earn lot of money. Si ellos vivieran más cerca, les visitaríamos cada semana. - If they lived closer, we would visit them every week. To express hypotheses in Spanish:use si followed by El Imperfecto Subjuntivo, then use El Condicional Simple in the second part of the sentence. ATTENTION: You can never use El Modo Indicativo or any other past tenses in this context.

Using El Pluscuamperfecto Subjuntivo in hypothetical clauses (si) followed by El Condicional Perfecto/ El Pluscuamperfecto de Subjuntivo

Here's a hypothetical situation in English: If we had won the lottery, we would have bought a Ferrari. Here you can see that if is followed by a verb in the Pluperfect (had won), while the second clause uses the Conditional Perfect (would have bought). Now look at the Spanish: Si hubiésemos ganado la lotería, habríamos comprado un Ferrari. Si hubiésemos ganado la lotería, hubiéramos comprado un Ferrari. Si hubiésemos ganado la lotería, hubiésemos comprado un Ferrari. Here you see that in Spanish, si is followed by a verb in El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto de Subjuntivo (hubiésemos ganado), while the second clause uses either: El Condicional Perfecto (habríamos comprado) or El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto de Subjuntivo (hubiéramos/hubiésemos comprado) All cases above are equally correct. In this type of conditional sentence the condition is seen as impossible, so that the action of the main clause is not fulfilled. Here are more examples: Si hubiera llegado antes habría visto a Carlos en la fiesta. - If I had arrived earlier I would have seen Carlos at the party. Si hubiera llegado antes, hubiera visto a Carlos en la fiesta. - If I had arrived earlier, I would have seen Carlos at the party. Si tú hubieras firmado ese contrato te habrías arrepentido. - If you had signed that contract you would have regretted it. Si no hubiésemos comprado esta casa, hubiésemos tenido más dinero para vacaciones. - If we hadn't bought this house, we would have had more money for holidays. You need auxiliary verb "haber" in both parts of the sentence: in the conditional clause after "si" and in the main clause.

Using unos, unas + number = about/approximately

If unos/unas is used before a number, it usually means "about", "some" or "approximately". Like adjectives, the article must agree with the noun in number and gender. For example: La película dura unos ochenta minutos.The film lasts about eighty minutes. El taxi tardó unos veinte minutos.The taxi took about twenty minutes. Tengo unos cincuenta euros en la cartera.I have about fifty euros in the wallet. In the examples above, the number is invariable and it never changes its form. Now, look at these examples: Elías tenía unas cuatrocientas libras en el banco.Elías had about four hundred pounds in the bank. El viaje ha sido unos doscientos kilómetros.The trip was approximately two hundred kilometers. Note that in the examples above, the whole hundreds from 200 onwards (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, etc.) agree with the noun they precede. Be careful because with other hundreds like 203, 345, etc., the tens and units do not change, just the hundreds. For example: Había unas quinientas treinta y cuatro especies en peligro de extinción.There were about five hundred and thirty-four species in danger of extinction. Extra note: If we are talking about "certain quantities" of something, be careful to agree the article unos/unas with the noun immediately after. For example: Usaron unos doscientos litros de agua para llenar la piscina.They used about 200 litres of water to fill up the pool. The agreement is with litros, and not agua.

Más que/Menos que vs Más de/Menos de (More/Less than)

In Spanish there are two ways to say "More/less than": 1. Using DE Más de = More than Menos de = Less/Fewer than These forms will be used when we talk about quantities. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Tengo más de diez caramelos en mi bolso.I have more than ten sweets in my handbag. He tardado menos de una hora en llegar.It took me less than one hour to get here. 2. Using QUE Más que = More than Menos que = Less/Fewer than These forms will be used when we talk about comparisons. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Hoy he comido más que ayer.Today I ate more than yesterday. Elisa fuma menos que tú.Elisa smokes less than you.

Using ir por to express what point/stage someone has reached

If we want to express what point or stage we have reached when doing something that is understood as having steps or stages, we can use: Ir por [something] The context can vary; it could be used when talking about reading a book, walking some distance, watching a TV series, etc For example: Voy por la mitad del libro más o menos, así que no me cuentes el final. - I am halfway through the book more or less, so don't tell me [what happens at] the end. Te estamos esperando, Carlos. -Llego en 5 minutos, voy por la calle Sierpes. We are waiting for you, Carlos. -I'll be there in 5 minutos, I am on Sierpes street. Marta se pasó un poco ayer. Iba por la quinta cerveza y se puso a bailar en las mesas. -Marta went overdid it yesterday. She was on her fifth beer and she started to dance on the tables. Estoy muy contento con las ventas de este mes. Vamos por los 2 millones de euros y todavía nos quedan 5 días para terminar julio. - I am very happy with this month's sales. We reached 2 million euros and we still have another 5 days until the end of July. In all the examples above someone is at/has reached a specific point/stage (expressed with ir por) How to ask where someone is at: ¿Por dónde vas? - Where are you at?

Using nunca in negative sentences

If we want to make a negative sentence in Spanish to express You never [do something] we use the adverb nunca (never), and we generally follow one of the following formulas: 1. No + [sentence] + nunca No comes chocolate nunca. - You never eat chocolate. 2. Nunca + [affirmative sentence] Nunca comes chocolate. - You never eat chocolate. When using the double negative no and nunca, the word nunca doesn't always have to be placed at the very end of the sentence. You could place it anywhere after the verb, and regardless of the position the meaning of the sentence remains the same. For example: Ella no ve la televisión en su habitación nunca. - She never watches television in her room. Ella no ve nunca la televisión en su habitación. - She never watches television in her room. Ella no ve la televisión nunca en su habitación. - She never watches television in her room Bear in mind that when the verb comes with direct object, indirect object or reflexive pronouns, these can't be separated from the verb. e.g No te podía ver con claridad nunca. - I could never see you clearly. No te podía ver nunca con claridad. - I could never see you clearly. Also, the subject (if there is an explicit one) tends to be in front of nunca, not after: Carmen nunca añade sal a sus comidas. - Carmen never adds salt to her meals. Mis padres nunca han estado en Madrid. - My parents have never been to Madrid. With perfect tenses you need to be careful not to break the verbal structure. You cannot place nunca between the auxiliary haber and the participle. e.g Nunca hemos estado en un parque temático. - We've never been in a theme park. Ella no había cocinado ese plato nunca. - She had never cooked that meal.

Using neuter article Lo + adverb/adjective + que + verb in Spanish

In Spanish "lo" is a neuter article that can be used with adverbs and adjectives (not nouns) followed by "que", to express surprise/admiration/disappointment about how something/someone performs an action or about what someone/something is like. Have a look at the following examples with: Lo + adverb + que + (verb conjugated in the indicative) ¡Lo bien que baila Ramiro! - Ramiro dances so well! ¡Lo mal que hice el examen! - I did so poorly on the exam! ¡Lo rápido que corre ese coche! - That car goes so fast! ¡Lo lento que anda tu abuela! - Your grandma walks so slowly! Notice how, being adverbs, they don't agree with the subject. Be careful with adverbs that take the form of their adjective (e.g., rápidamente=rápido, lentamente=lento). In these cases we will use the masculine singular form of the adjective. This would be incorrect: "Lo lenta que anda tu abuela" Now have a look at some examples with: Lo + adjective + que + (verb conjugated in the indicative) ¡Lo simpático que parece ese chico! - That boy seems so friendly! ¡Lo seria que es esa chica! - That girl is so serious! ¡Lo verdes que están los campos esta primavera! - The fields are so green this spring! ¡Lo altas que son tus hijas! - Your daughters are so tall! Notice how in the examples above, used with adjectives, these agree with the subjects in gender and number (simpático/chico, seria/chica, verdes/campos, altas/hijas). It is sometimes difficult to know when a word is an adverb or an adjective, but as a general rule, in this type of sentence you will know that it is an adjective if the verb in the sentence is "ser", "estar" or "parecer"." So in these cases the adjective will agree in gender and number with the subject. In all the cases mentioned above "lo" is invariable. This type of structure isn't always in the form of an exclamatory sentence, as in the above examples; it can also be a subordinate clause. Have a look: No sabes lo bien que actuó mi hijo en la obra del colegio. - You don't know how well my son performed in the school production. Ahora vas a ver lo bonita que es mi casa. - You are going to see now how pretty my house is. Mira lo chulos que son esos pantalones. - Look how cool those trousers [US: pants] are. It is also used with ordinal numbers, not necessarily to express surprise/admiration/disappointment, as with the examples above, but when simply meaning: "the first thing that ....."the second thing that ...": Lo + ordinal number + que + [conjugated verb] Lo primero que haré cuando llegue a casa es tumbarme en el sofá. - The first thing I'll do when I get home is lie on the sofa. Lo segundo que me dijo mi jefe fue que tenía que ser más puntual.The second thing my boss told me was that I had to be more punctual.

Using the "accidental" reflexive (se) with an indirect object pronoun

In Spanish "se" is used in verbs/sentences that imply that something happens by accident or unintentionally. Between "se" and the conjugated verb is an indirect object pronoun (me, te, le, nos, os, les) to indicate who/what the accident happened to. Let's have a look at some examples: Se me rompió el reloj ayer. - My watch broke (accidentally) yesterday. See how the verb romper (to break) is conjugated in the 3rd person singular (matching el reloj) and "me" is between "se" and the verb, expressing that it happened to me. Se le cayeron los libros. - He/she (accidentally) dropped his/her books. See how this time the verb caer (to drop) is conjugated in the 3rd person plural (matching "los libros") and "le" is in between "se" and the verb, expressing that it happened to "him" or "her". Typical verbs that are used to express unintentional or accidental occurrences are: -romperse (to break) -caerse (to drop) -olvidarse (to forget) -acabarse (to run out of) -perderse (to lose) -quemarse (to burn) -quedarse (to leave behind) Here are more examples: Se nos han olvidado las llaves. - We forgot the keys. ¡Se te está quemando la tostada! - Your toast is burning! (your = belonging to "tú") Se les van a caer las cajas de las manos. - They are going to drop the boxes. (lit: The boxes are going to fall from their hands.) ¿Se os ha perdido el gato? - Did you lose your cat? (you = "vosotros") Se nos ha acabado la tinta de la impresora. - We ran out of ink for the printer. Se me ha quedado el libro en casa. - I left the book (behind) at home. This type of structure has a specific effect which takes the "blame" away from the person and emphasises the accidental nature and/or how unexpected the action is. These two sentences for example mean the same but have a different effect: He perdido mi móvil. - I lost my mobile phone. Se me ha perdido mi móvil. - I (accidentally) lost my mobile phone / My mobile got lost. In the first sentence, we put the "blame" on "I", however in the second sentence it looks like the blame is on "the mobile". Also bear in mind that generally these verbs used in the accidental "se" move away from their original meaning when they are used with se. For example: caer (to fall) but caerse (to drop) acabar (to finish) but acabarse (to run out of) quedar (to remain) but quedarse (to leave behind) Remember: Se + [me, te, le, nos, os, les] + verb in 3rd person singular/plural + subject

Forming the imperative of tú for all irregular verbs (irregular affirmative commands)

In Spanish there is a short list of irregular verbs in El Imperativo for the tú form. These are known as short imperatives. These are the irregular verbs for the tú form in El Imperativo: Tener (to have) = Ten Venir (to come) = Ven Salir (to go out) = Sal Poner (to put) = Pon Decir (to say) = Di Hacer (to do) = Haz Ir (to go) = Ve Ser (to be) = Sé Have a look and listen to some examples: ¡Ten cuidado!Be careful! [lit: have care] Nuria ¡ven aquí!Nuria, come here! ¡Sal ahora mismo de aquí!Get out of here right now! Carlos ¡Pon los libros en su sitio!Carlos, put the books away! ¡Di algo por favor!Say something please! ¡Haz tus deberes!Do your homework! María! Ve al mercado!María, go to the market! ¡Sé bueno!Be good!

Using prepositions a, para, por, de, en, sin, hacia followed by a pronoun

In Spanish all prepositions can be followed by a pronoun in order to express to me, for me, about you, in him, without us, towards them, etc. Let's look at some examples. With the preposition a Los profesores me han dado un certificado a mí.The teachers have given a certificate to me. ¿A ti te afecta la crisis?Does the crisis affect you? Le hemos explicado a ella el problema.We have explained the problem to her. Notice how when the preposition "a" is used with a pronoun, it is reinforcing the other indirect pronoun also present in the sentence. For example: Le dieron un regalo. Le dieron un regalo a ella.They gave her a present. They gave her a present (to her). With the prepositions por and para Antonio lo ha hecho por mí.Antonio has done it for me. Para ti es muy fácil todo.For you everything is easy. Ellos se preocupan mucho por nosotros.They worry a lot about us. Para vosotras todo esto es una broma.For you [plural] all this is a joke. With the preposition de Las chicas están hablando de mí.The girls are talking about me. Gracias, hemos aprendido mucho de ti.Thank you, we've learnt a lot from you. Es un honor, viniendo de usted.It is an honour, coming from you [formal]. With the preposition en ¿Tú crees en mí?Do you believe in me? Confiamos en ti para el éxito del proyecto.We have confidence in you for the sucess of the project. Tenemos dos hijos y nos concentramos mucho en ellos.We have two sons and we focus a lot on them. With the preposition sin ¡Fuisteis a la fiesta sin mí!You went to the party without me! No sé qué hacer sin ti.I don't know what to do without you. Sin ellas no podemos continuar la clase.Without them we cannot continue with the class. With the preposition hacia Hay un gato negro que camina hacia mí.There is a black cat that is walking towards me. El viento fuerte sopla hacia ti y es difícil caminar.The strong wind is blowing towards you and it is difficult to walk. El policía fue hacia él y lo arrestó.The policeman went towards him and arrested him. With the preposition sobre Puse una manta sobre él porque tenía frío.I put a blanket on top of him because he was cold. Yo soy honesto. No puedo decir lo mismo sobre ti.I am honest. I can't say the same about you. Los pájaron volaban sobre nosotras.The birds were flying above us. Notice how the first two pronouns (me, you) are: mí, ti. The rest of the forms are the same as the subject pronouns (él, ella, usted, nosotros, nosotras, vosotros, vosotras, ellos, ellas, ustedes). Also remember: mí has a written accent [´] while ti does not.

Using the imperfect subjunctive after the conjunction como si (subordinate manner clauses)

In Spanish the conjunction como si (as if/like) is used to form subordinate clauses. These clauses express the way something is done. It is always followed by the subjunctive. In this lesson we will explain how it works with El Imperfecto Subjuntivo. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Pedro se comporta como si fuera un adolescente. - Pedro behaves as if he were a teenager. Me habla como si quisiera convencerme. - He talks to me as if he wanted to convince me. Nos trataron como si fuésemos delincuentes. - They treated us as if we were criminals. Unlike in English where as if is often followed by a past tense in the indicative, in Spanish como si can never be followed by a tense in the indicative or El Presente de Subjuntivo.

Using Todo aquel que for "anyone who/whoever/those who" (demonstratives)

In Spanish the demonstrative "aquel" can be combined with "todo" to express what in English is generally translated as whoever, and also sometimes "anyone who..." or "those who...". Todo aquel que... = Whoever... Let's see some examples: Todo aquel que lleve más de 5 años aquí podrá solicitar la nacionalidad. - Anyone who has been here for over 5 years will be able to apply for nationality. Todo aquel que haya hecho prepago puede pasar a la ventanilla 2. - All those who have prepaid may go to desk 2. Voy a contar mi historia a todo aquel que me escuche atentamente. - I'm going to tell my story to whoever listens carefully. "Todo aquel" refers to a neutral and general "whoever"; it refers to both men and women in general without any distinction in gender. However we can also use the different genders and plurals of the demonstrative "aquel" when we need to be more specific: Toda aquella que sea madre me entenderá. - Anyone who is a mother will understand me. (Referring to women) Todas aquellas que se apunten al curso hoy tendrán un descuento. - All those who sign up today will receive a discount. (Referring to women) Invitaré a la fiesta a todos aquellos que sean buenos amigos. - I will invite all those who are good friends to my party. (Referring to men) Remember that the masculine plural "todos aquellos que" can also refer to the general public, i.e. including men and women. Todos aquellos que protestaron, tuvieron compensación. - All those who protested received compensation. Here, todos aquellos refers to both men and women. The only way to know if it refers to just men would be by having mentioned it previously. Otherwise we understand that it refers to both. Interesting note: We can omit "todo/-a/-os/-as" without changing the meaning: Aquel que tenga sed puede pedir permiso para beber agua.Todo aquel que tenga sed puede pedir permiso para beber agua. - Those who may be thirsty can ask permission to drink water. Aquellas que se negaron al principio, ahora se están arrepintiendo.Todas aquellas que se negaron al principio, ahora se están arrepintiendo. - Those who refused in the beginning are regretting it now. Watch out for agreement with the verb: Todo aquel que vino ya se fue Todos aquellos que vinieron ya se fueron. - Those who came already left. Todo aquello que... (referring to either material things or abstract ideas) We also use "Todo aquello que", referring to "anything that...", "all that...". For example: Coge todo aquello que necesites. - Take anything you need. Vamos a incluir en el contrato todo aquello que beneficie a la empresa. - We are going to include in the contract all that is beneficial for the company. This is the equivalent to the most commonly used "todo lo que...". Todo aquello que... is more formal. Todo aquel/todo aquello/todos aquellos que can be followed by the indicative or the subjunctive. Here are some examples using the indicative: Todo aquel que prueba mi gazpacho dice que está muy rico. - Everyone that tries my gazpacho says it is very tasty. Todos aquellos que llegaron ayer van a hacer una excursión a Segovia. - All those who arrived yesterday are going on a trip to Segovia.

Using preposition con followed by a pronoun to say with me, you, him, her, us, you (plural), them

In Spanish the preposition con is followed by a pronoun in order to express with me, with you, with him, with her, with us, with you and with them. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Mi hija siempre viene conmigo al médico - .My daughter always comes to the doctor with me. ¿Estuvo Laura contigo ayer? - Was Laura with you yesterday? [you = tú] No puedo hablar con él. - I can't speak to him. Con ella la vida es más fácil. - With her, life is easier. El abuelo viene con nosotros en el coche. - Grandpa is coming in the car with us. El bebé duerme con vosotros en la habitación doble. - The baby sleeps with you in the double bedroom. Comimos con ellos el sábado pasado. - We had lunch with them last Saturday. Quisiéramos hablar con usted en privado. - We'd like to speak with you in private. El guía irá con ustedes a la excursión. - The guide will go on the trip with you. Important note: The first two examples have irregular forms "conmigo" and "contigo". They form a single word and cannot be separated from the preposition con. The rest of the forms are the subject pronouns (él, ella, usted, nosotros, nosotras, vosotros, vosotras, ellos, ellas, ustedes). It is important to remember not to use other pronoun forms, e.g. direct object pronouns or indirect object pronouns. These would be incorrect: Ven con me. (Come with me.) María bailó con le. (Maria danced with him.) These are correct: ¡Ven conmigo! (Come with me!) María bailó con él. (Maria danced with him.)

Using volverse to express to become/to turn (verbs of change)

In Spanish the verb volverse is used to express change in a person or a situation, the same way in English "become/turn" is used, for example: "Andrew became a vegetarian in his fifties" or "Her attitude turned very selfish". Have a look at the following examples: Ella se volvió muy presumida a los quince años. - She became very vain at fifteen. Su actitud se volvió violenta de repente. - His attitude turned aggressive all of a sudden. Luis y Marta se han vuelto una pareja aburrida. - Luis and Marta have become a boring couple. Generally volverse is used to indicate changes in a person's character, personality or attitude. You will find it followed by either an adjective or a noun (sometimes with an article). Bear in mind that there are other verbs that also express change: convertirse (en) = to become hacerse = to become ponerse = to become quedarse = to become In certain cases ponerse and volverse are interchangeable, for example: Antonio se ha puesto nervioso. Necesita un calmante. - Antonio has become nervous. He needs some medication. Antonio se ha vuelto más nervioso en los últimos años. - Antonio has become more nervous in the last few years. In the first example, ponerse implies a more temporary change whilst in the second, volverse implies a more permanent change. In the same way, sometimes hacerse and volverse are interchangeable, for example: Megan se ha hecho española. - Megan has become Spanish. Megan se ha vuelto española. - Megan has become Spanish. In the first example, using hacerse, the change is thought to be "intentional", meaning in this case that she has become Spanish by obtaining Spanish nationality. In the second example, using volverse, the change is thought to be "unintentional" - as if she is "behaving" like a Spanish person - as a result of living in Spain, for example. Remember that volverse used with this meaning is always a reflexive verb.

Using convertirse en / ponerse / hacerse / quedarse to express "to become" (verbs of change)

In Spanish there are different ways to express "to become", which can be confusing for English speakers. Depending on the context we use: convertirse (en) = to become hacerse = to become ponerse = to become quedarse = to become 1. Convertirse (en) We use this to refer to "a radical change" in personality or in profession, for example: Después de años trabajando como extra se convirtió en una actriz muy famosa. - After years working as an extra she became a very famous actress. El abuelo se ha convertido en un anciano muy gruñón. - Grandpa has become a very grumpy old man. Notice the preposition "en" is required after the verb. 2. Hacerse We use this to refer to profession, ideology or religion. Mi hermana se hizo dentista. - My sister became a dentist. Miguel se va a hacer republicano. - Miguel is becoming a republican. Se ha hecho vegetariana después de ver el documental. - She became a vegetarian after watching the documentary. Alicia se hizo católica. - Alicia became a Catholic. Note: convertirse en and hacerse are very often interchangeable, although convertirse en suggests a more radical change. When we talk about someone becoming "famous", we can either say: hacerse famoso/-a or convertirse en alguien famoso Lady Gaga se hizo muy famosa en 2008. - Lady Gaga became famous in 2008. Lady Gaga se convirtió en una cantante famosa en 2008. - Lady Gaga became a famous singer in 2008. 3. Ponerse We use this to refer to temporary changes in health or mood, and to physical changes in general. Mi hijo pequeño se puso enfermo. - My younger son became ill. Te pusiste muy triste. - You became/got very sad. Ella se puso roja al ver a Javier. - She became/turned red when she saw Javier. Mi padre se ha puesto muy gordo. - My dad has become/got very fat. 4. Quedarse We generally use this to refer to permanent physical changes. Luis se quedó sordo de pequeño. - Luis became deaf when he was a boy. El pobre hombre se ha quedado paralítico. - The poor man has become paralyzed. All these verbs are pronominal verbs (i.e., have reflexive pronouns) but only convertirse is followed by the preposition "en".

Impersonal sentences using the ellos form of the verb

In Spanish there are many ways to make impersonal sentences, for example using the impersonal "se": En este bar se come muy bien, or using impersonal verbs that never have a subject, like llueve mucho. Using a passive form also makes a sentence impersonal, e.g El hombre fue acusado de homicidio. - There is no hidden subject in any of these sentences. Another way is to use the 3rd person plural form of the verb (the ellos/ellas form) in any tense, but without using the subject pronoun. This is not the same as using "they" as a generic group. English does not have an equivalent structure so there is no literal way of translating sentences written in this way. You have to use a variety of impersonal structures. Have a look at the following examples: Dicen que mañana lloverá. - Apparently it will rain tomorrow. Están llamando al teléfono. - The phone is ringing. ¡Me han robado! - I've been robbed! Notice how in all the examples above there is no mention of "who" or "what" does the action; this is because we do not know or it is not relevant. Important: This structure looks identical to using a 3rd person plural while omitting the subject pronoun "ellos/ellas". In impersonal sentences, we deliberately omit the pronoun because we simply do not know who or what performed the action of the verb. This is not the same as when we choose not to use the subject pronoun because it has been mentioned previously and because the ending of the verb tells us who the subject is. This type of sentence is not an impersonal structure. Be careful, you may wrongly infer all 3rd person plural sentences which omit the subject pronoun are impersonal. Or you may wrongly infer that all 3rd person plural sentences which omit the subject pronoun are just assuming you know who the subject is already. Take a look at the first sentence above but this time with a subject. Carmen y Rosa llaman a la puerta. - Carmen and Rosa are knocking on the door. We know who they are because we were expecting them or we can see them through the peephole. but Llaman a la puerta. - Someone is knocking on the door/There's someone at the door. We don't know who it is as we weren't expecting anyone in particular, it could be anyone. Take a look at this other example: ¡Parad a esos dos hombres! ¡Me han robado! - Stop those two men! They robbed me! Here we know who the subject is because it has been mentioned before, so ¡Me han robado! is simply omitting the subject because it is obvious and there is no need to repeat it. This is not an impersonal sentence. but ¡Me han robado! - I've been robbed! You may or may not know who robbed you, but even if you did know, the focus of this sentence is on what happened, not who did it. It is not relevant at that moment. Take a look at these other examples: Me han engañado. - I've been tricked/Someone lied to me. Le han suspendido. - He failed [an exam]. Tardaron mucho en construír los apartamentos. - It took a long time to build the apartments. En este colegio enseñan bien. - In this school the teaching is good.

Personal "a" verbs (ver, visitar, buscar, conocer)

In Spanish there are some transitive verbs (verbs that have a direct object) and depending on if the object is inanimate (a thing) or animate (a person/animal), the verb works slightly different. Have a look at these examples: Yo veo la televisión todos los días.I watch television everyday. Yo veo a Miguel todos los días.I see Miguel everyday. Notice how in the first example where the object is a thing (la televisión) there is no preposition "a" between the verb and the object. However in the second example, the object is a person (Miguel), therefore the verb needs preposition "a" before the object. Let's see other verbs that need the preposition "a": Visitar (to visit) ¿Vais a visitar La Sagrada Familia este sábado?Are you going to visit La Sagrada Familia this Saturday? ¿Vais a visitar a la abuela este sábado?Are you visiting grandma this Saturday? Notice how in the second example visitar needs preposition "a" as the direct object is a person (la abuela). Buscar (to look for) Estamos buscando una farmacia para comprar paracetamol.We are looking for a chemist to buy some paracetamol. Estamos buscando a mi gata Lulu. Ha desaparecido.We are looking for my cat Lulu. She has vanished. Notice how on the second example buscar needs preposition "a" as the direct object is a pet (mi gata). Conocer (to know) ¿Conoces esa canción tan pegadiza de Luis Fonsi?Do you know that catchy song by Luis Fonsi? ¿Conoces a mi primo Gerardo?Do you know my cousin Gerardo? Notice how in the second example conocer needs the preposition "a" as the direct object is the speaker's cousin. You will also find a "personal a" in front of indefinite pronouns which refer to people (e.g alguien, nadie...) ¿Habéis visto a alguien por la calle esta mañana?Have you seen anyone in the street this morning? No conozco a nadie de Noruega.I don't know anyone from Norway.

Using aquí, ahí and allí = here and there

In Spanish there are three adverbs that express distance which are: aquí (here) ahí (there) allí (there) Aquí = here AQUÍ is used to refer to a near distance, i.e near the speaker, the same way it is used in English. Have a look and listen to these examples: Mi cuaderno está aquí.My notebook is here. Aquí están las llaves del coche.The car keys are here. Ahí and Allí = there Unlike in English there are 2 adverbs to express the notion of there. The difference can be tricky to understand for learners, but basically AHÍ is used to express a "nearer" there than ALLÍ which is even further away. Let's look at each in turn. Ahí AHÍ is used to talk about a middle distance (between the speaker/s and the object or person they are talking about) or to talk about an object or person that is near the listener. Have a look and listen to these examples: Ahí está Fernando, vamos a saludarle.Fernando is there, let's say hello to him. Ahí está tu bolígrafo, al lado de tu libro.Your pen is there, near your book. In the first example, the speakers are together and are talking about another person (Fernando) who is a bit further away from both of them. In the second example, the speaker is pointing at something (el bolígrafo) which is near the listener. In both cases we use ahí. Allí ALLÍ talks about a further away distance from the speaker, the same way "there/over there" is used in English. Have a look and listen to these examples: Los servicios están allí, al fondo del pasillo.The toilets are over there, at the end of the corridor. Me encanta Japón. Quiero ir allí este verano.I love Japan. I want to go there this summer.

El Imperfecto progresivo vs El Indefinido progresivo (was +ing)

In Spanish there are two forms that can be used where in English you would use the past progressive tense "was/were +ing". Which form you need depends on the timeframe of the ongoing action in the past. 1. El Imperfecto progresivo Estar [in El Pretérito Imperfecto] + gerund [-ando/-iendo] For example: Susana estaba escribiendo una carta. Susana was writing a letter. Los niños estaban jugando en el jardín. - The children were playing in the garden. -¿Qué estábais haciendo? -Estábamos viendo la tele.-What were you doing? -We were watching telly. Ella estaba lavándose el pelo cuando él llegó. - She was washing her hair when he arrived. We use the Imperfecto progresivo in these cases: - When the ongoing action is simply describing "what was happening" without any emphasis or implication about start or end time (see the first three examples above). - When it is combined with another action that interrupts the ongoing action at that time. The interrupting action is generally in the simple past (see the last example where the ongoing action "She was washing her hair" was interrupted by another sudden action "he arrived". 2. El Indefinido progresivo Estar [in El Pretérito Indefinido + gerund [-ando/-iendo] For example: Ayer estuvimos bailando toda la noche. - Yesterday we were dancing all night. ¿Qué estuvisteis haciendo de 6 a 7 de la tarde? - What were you doing from 6 till 7 pm? El sábado pasado estuve corrigiendo exámenes. - Last Saturday I was marking exams. We use the Indefinido progresivo in this case: - When the ongoing past action is inside a completed timeframe in the past. See how all examples above contain a time phrase: "toda la noche", "de 6 a 7 de la tarde", "el sábado pasado". Bear in mind that the Imperfecto progresivo, when it is used to describe a scene purely in the past, can very often be interchangeable with the Imperfecto. For example: Estaba lloviendo y la gente estaba corriendo para protegerse de la lluvia. (Imperfecto progresivo) Llovía y la gente corría para protegerse de la lluvia. (Imperfecto) (It was raining and people were running for cover from the rain.) Careful: Sometimes the timeframe isn't specific about having a beginning and an end so you may find this type of sentences using El Indefinido Progresivo [estuve+gerund] Estuvimos almorzando hasta que acabamos con toda la comida y luego nos fuimos al cine. - We were having lunch until we finished all the food and then we went to the cinema. We don't know when the "eating" started, but the end is expressed with "hasta que nos acabamos toda la comida". - This may sound as if that is an interrupting action and may lead you to wrongly think you need to use El Imperfecto Progresivo [estaba+gerund].

Using ser de un/una [noun]

In Spanish there is a structure that is used to talk about something/someone's quality. This specific structure somehow highlights that quality. For this we use: Ser + de + un/una + [noun+ adjective] It is generally used with certain adjectives that are either very positive or very negative. Have a look at the following examples: Estos productos son de un sabor exquisito. - These products are exquisitely flavourful. La maquinaria es de una categoría superior. - The machinery is of superior quality. Esa cantante es de un talento extraordinario. - That singer is extraordinarily talented. Su vestimenta era de un gusto pésimo. - His outfit was appallingly ugly. This structure is not common in colloquial Spanish; it is more formal and slightly more poetic. If we wanted to convey the same meaning in a more colloquial way, we would simply have said: "Estos productos tienen un sabor exquisito." "La maquinaria tiene una categoría superior." "Esa cantante tiene un talento extraordinario." "Su vestimenta era muy vulgar."

Using ir + [gerund] to emphasise the progression of an action

In Spanish we can emphasise the progression of an action in different tenses by using: Ir [conjugated] + gerund of second verb [-ing form] By using this structure we stress the progression of the action, which is expressed by the second verb. It has the nuance of "doing something bit by bit". In English it is generally translated into the progressive tense, i.e. am doing/was doing/will be doing, have been doing, and in some cases into "go on doing something " or "get on with doing something". Have a look at the following examples: Ella va poniendo la mesa mientras yo termino de cocinar. - She is laying the table while I finish cooking. Los estudiantes fueron terminando las últimas preguntas del examen. - The students were finishing off the last questions of the exam. Nosotros iremos pintando los huevos de pascua para la fiesta de los niños más tarde. - We will be getting on with painting the Easter eggs for the children's party later. Carmen ha ido llamando a los clientes mientras yo hablaba con el jefe. - Carmen has been calling the clients (one by one) while I was talking to the boss. Es bueno que hayas ido despidiéndote de todos antes de tu viaje a Brasil. - It is good that you have gradually said goodbye to everyone before your trip to Brazil. Bear in mind that, although this usage is very similar to the progressive tense with estar + gerund, using verb ir + gerund is more emphatic.

Using acabar/terminar + [infinitive/gerund] = to end up doing something (perífrasis verbal)

In Spanish we can express "To end up doing [something]" in 4 different ways: 1. Acabar (conjugated) por + Infinitivo 2. Terminar (conjugated) por + Infinitivo Have a look and listen to the following examples: Ella era tan exigente que acabó por regalarle un diamante.She was so demanding that he ended up buying her a diamond. Después de 10 años juntos ella terminó por dejarle.After 10 years together she ended up leaving him. Notice how preposition "por" always follows "acabar/terminar" in the examples above. We can use the same verbs in a different way and the meaning does not change: 3. Acabar (conjugated) + Gerundio 4. Terminar (conjugated)+ Gerundio For example: Carlos acabó llorando debido al estrés en el trabajo.Carlos ended up crying because of stress at work. Laura terminó obedeciendo a su padre a pesar de la discusión.Laura ended up obeying her father despite the argument. Notice how in these examples above there is no preposition at all and the conjugated verb is followed by a gerund (not an infinitive). This verbal periphrase can be used in different tenses. Have a look and listen to the following examples: En mi relación con Luis, siempre acabo cediendo yo.In my relationship with Luis, I always end up compromising. He acabado por apuntarme a esa clase de yoga los martes.I've ended up signing up for that yoga class on Tuesdays. Terminarás por convencerme de esa idea tan loca.You will end up convincing me to go along with that crazy idea. All these structures are interchangeable. Be careful not to mix them up by using infinitive instead of gerund, or the other way round.

Using de tan/tanto + que/como to express a cause (subordinate causal clause)

In Spanish we can express a cause by using the following structure: De tan/tanto + que/como+ indicative There are different ways to use this structure: De tanto/a/os/as + noun + que/como + indicative No pudimos entrar en la fiesta de tanta gente que había. - We couldn't get into the party because there were so many people. Le dio un dolor de barriga de tantos chocolates como comió. - He got a stomach ache because of all those chocolates he ate. Creo que me voy a desmayar de tanto dolor que tengo en la pierna. - I think I am going to faint because my leg is so painful. No va a sentirse sola de tantas amigas como tiene en la facultad. - She won't feel lonely because she has so many friends at university. The clause introduced by "De tanto/a/os/as" expresses the reason the main clause happens. De tan+ adjective/adverb + que/como + indicative Lo van a echar del grupo de tan soso como es. - He is going to get kicked out of the group because he is very dull. De tan bien que baila le van a dar un premio. - He is going to be given a prize because he dances so well. Un día de estos tendrá un accidente de tan mal como conduce. - One of these days he will have an accident because he drives so badly. The clause introduced by "De tan" expresses the reason the main clause happens. De tanto/tan poco que/como + indicative De tanto que come se va a poner gordísimo. - He is going to get really fat because he eats so much. Lo van a echar del trabajo de tanto como se queja - .He's going to get fired because he complains so much. Parece que tiene 20 años más de tan poco como se cuida. - She looks 20 years older because she doesn't look after herself at all. Te vas a convertir en un solitario de tan poco que sales. - You will become a loner because you hardly go out. The clause introduced by "De tanto/tan poco" expresses the reason the main clause happens. Note that que and como are interchangeable in all the above examples. The clause can be placed at the beginning of the sentence or at the end.

Using más que for "only / just"

In Spanish we can use "más que" to express "only / just". For this it is necessary to have a verb in the negative. Más que + a noun No tenía más que unas monedas en el bolsillo. - He only had a few coins in his pocket. No llevo esperando más que unos minutos. - I've only been waiting a few minutes. No busca más que pelea. - He is just looking for trouble. Sometimes "nada" is also placed in front of más que: No busca nada más que pelea. - He is just looking for trouble. Más que + infinitive No tienes más que decirlo y yo estaré allí para ayudarte. - You just have to say it and I will be there to help you. No tienes más que escucharlo para darte cuenta de que es un mentiroso. - You only have to listen to him to realise he is a liar. No podemos más que sentarnos a esperar y dejar que la policía haga su trabajo. - We can only sit and wait and let the police do their job. Using más que with this purpose (instead of just using "solo") makes it more idiomatic and emphatic. Solo tienes que confiar en mí. (less emphatic) No tienes más que confiar en mí. (more emphatic) (You only have to trust me.) It is often used with "no tener más que", "no hay más que" or "no poder más que".

Ello versus eso (it/that): pronouns

In Spanish we can use both ello and eso as pronouns to refer to previously mentioned things or ideas. The main difference between the two is: ello is more formal and less commonly used eso is more colloquial and more commonly used They both mean either it or that, although depending on the context, sometimes it is not possible to use a literal translation in English. Both are often used after prepositions. Let's see some examples: Carlos está pasando por un momento difícil. Eso me entristece. - Carlos is going through a difficult patch. It/that makes me sad. Hoy vamos a aprender sobre la Revolución Francesa. Para ello, vamos a empezar leyendo sobre la sociedad francesa de esa época. - Today we are going to learn about the French Revolution. To achieve that, we will start reading about French society back then. -¿Me ayudarás a repasar para el examen? -Sí, cuenta con ello. -Will you help me revise for the exam? -Yes, [you can] count on it. Los divorcios suelen ser complicados. Por ello, debemos dialogar mucho con los hijos durante el trámite. - Divorces are usually complicated. That's why [lit: because of that], we must talk a lot with the children during the process. Nuestro hijo tiene problemas en el colegio y necesitamos hablar de eso urgentemente. - Our son is having problems at school and we need to talk about it urgently. Las ventas han bajado considerablemente. Ello se debe a la mala calidad de los productos. - There has been a considerable drop in sales. That is due to the bad quality of the products. In all the examples above, eso and ello would be interchangeable, although as already explained, using "ello" conveys a more formal register. However, when it/that are the direct object of the sentence, only eso is acceptable. Have a look: Incluya eso en el contrato por favor. - Include that in the contract please. This is incorrect:"Incluya ello en el contrato por favor." With "gustar", we generally use "eso" as the subject of the sentence. Using "ello" is unusual. En mi empresa los sueldos son bajos y a mí eso no me gusta. - Salaries in my company are low and I don't like that. This would be unusual: ]"En mi empresa los sueldos son bajos y a mí ello no me gusta."

Using llevar + participio to express the completion of an action so far

In Spanish we can use the verb llevar followed by a past participle to express the completion of an action. The effect of using this verbal structure is similar to using haber + past participle, however using llevar gives a nuance of accumulation or repetition, and implies that the action will continue in the future. Let's see some examples: Llevamos recorridos 6 kilómetros. Esta tarde seguiremos caminando. - [So far] we've done 6 kilometres. We will continue to walk this afternoon. Llevaba leídas al menos 50 páginas y de repente perdí el libro. - [Until then] I had read at least 50 pages and all of a sudden I lost the book. Este autor lleva publicadas 5 novelas cortas. - This author has [had] published 5 short novels [so far]. ¿Llevas ahorrados 150 euros? - Have you saved [so far] 150 euros? In all these examples we can see a completed action [so far/until then] but we get the sense of a possible continuation in the future, by using llevar. If we had used the perfect tense with haber, that possible continuation wouldn't be implied. Había leído al menos 50 páginas y de repente perdí el libro. (I had read at least 50 pages and all of a sudden I lost the book.) (completed action, no sense of possible continuation) Notice that when we use this structure with llevar, the participle agrees in gender and number with the object: recorridos, kilómetros leídas, páginas publicadas, novelas ahorrados, euros Sometimes when using this structure, the meaning is a bit more literal and used to express how something is presented or what something includes. For example: Señora, ese precio lleva incluido un 10 por ciento de descuento. - Madam, that price includes a 10 percent discount. El dispositivo lleva incorporado un sensor. - The device is fitted with a sensor. Ayer Andrés llevaba puesta una camisa de flores horrorosa. - Yesterday Andrés was wearing a horrible flowery shirt.

Using tener + participio to express the completion of an action

In Spanish we can use the verb tener followed by a past participle to express the completion of an action. The effect of using this verbal structure is similar to using haber + participle, however using tener gives a nuance of a result obtained after accumulation or repetition of actions. Let's see some examples: Tengo escritas veinte páginas de mi futura novela. - I have written twenty pages of my future novel. Tienes pintadas dos habitaciones. Falta una más para terminar. - You have painted two rooms. There is one more left to finish. Notice how the past participle must agree in gender and number with the noun acting as a direct object. (escritas/páginas; pintadas/habitaciones: feminine plural noun) Here are some more examples: Marta y yo tenemos planeado un viaje a Egipto. - Marta and I have planned a trip to Egypt. ¿Tienes ya pensada la estrategia para convencer a Inés? - Have you thought of a plan to persuade Inés yet? Yo tenía organizados todos los documentos en orden alfabético. - I had all the documents organised in alphabetical order. In all of the above sentences there is a nuance of an accumulation or repetition of actions to get to a result. For example: Tengo pintadas dos habitaciones. implies that there is a repetition of an action, in this case, painting rooms, one after another, with a result expressed with "tengo pintadas dos habitaciones". ¿Tienes ya pensada la estrategia? implies that there has been an accumulation of "thinking" with a result expressed with "tienes pensada". If we simply used the perfect tense with haber, this nuance wouldn't exist. It would just express a completed action. - He pintado dos habitaciones. - He pensado en la estrategia. Sometimes this verbal structure implies an indication of keeping someone in a certain state (sometimes as a result following an accumulation/repetition of events). For example: Este libro me tiene intrigada. - This book has me hooked/intrigued. La noticia de Amanda nos tiene sorprendidas. - Amanda's news has surprised us. Ese chico la tiene tan enamorada... - She has really fallen for that guy. Notice how in all the examples there is a direct object pronoun (me, nos, la) because it is always about the effect on "someone".

Cuanto más/cuanto menos... for The more/The less...

In Spanish we use Cuanto más and Cuanto menos to say the more and the less in comparative sentences of this type: Cuanto más habla, menos atractivo me resulta. - The more he speaks, the less attractive I find him. Cuanto menos te vea, mejor. - The less I see you, the better. Cuanto más me miras, más me enamoro de ti. - The more you look at me, the more I fall in love with you. There are different types of comparisons using this structure. Cuanto más / menos + adjective, más/menos + adjective Cuanto más rubios, más atractivos para mí. - The blonder (they are), the more attractive I find them. Mis padres, cuanto más mayores, más delicados de salud. - My parents, the older (they get), the more their health suffers. El estofado, cuanto menos salado, más sabroso. - As for the stew, the less salty (it is), the tastier (it is). Cuanto más / menos + verb, más / menos + adjective /verb Cuanto menos hago, más vago me siento. - The less I do, the more lazy I feel. Cuanto menos sepa, menos sufriré.The less I know, the less I will suffer. Remember that cuanto is invariable in this type of sentence when it is comparing adjectives. This would be incorrect: Cuantos más rubios, más atractivos. Cuanto/-a/-os/-as más / menos + noun, más / menos ... When we use the same comparison structure with nouns, cuanto must agree in gender and number with the noun it is referring to. Cuanta más harina eches a la masa, más seca quedará. - The more flour you add to the dough, the drier it will get. Cuantos menos árboles planten, menos papel podrán fabricar. - The less trees they plant the less paper they will be able to make. Cuantas más personas vengan a mi fiesta, más divertido será. - The more people come to my party, the more fun it will be. Note that the second part of the sentence doesn't always need más or menos. It is also common to find the adjectives mejor and peor, for example: Cuanto más tiempo pasamos juntos, mejor nos llevamos. - The more time we spend together, the better we get on. Cuantas más tormentas, peor para las cosechas. - The more storms, the worse (it is) for the crops. Cuanto does not have a written accent when used in these comparative sentences. Extra note: Notice how we used both the indicative and the subjunctive in the examples in this lesson. This structure takes both. Using one or the other depends on whether we refer to something that actually happens in the present or something that will happen in the future. Este cuadro, cuanto más lo miro más me gusta. (present indicative- action that happens) - This picture, the more I look at it the more I like it. Este cuadro, cuanto más lo mires más te gustará. (present subjunctive- action that will happen in the future) - This picture, the more you look at it the more you will like it.

Using Estar por + infinitive to express feeling tempted/having the intention to do something

In Spanish we use estar por, followed by an infinitive, when there is an intention to do something or there is a temptation to do something, that something being what it is expressed with the infinitive. Estar por + infinitive For example: Estoy por confesar toda la verdad a mi novio. - I feel tempted to confess the whole truth to my boyfriend. Tus padres están por prohibirte que vayas a la fiesta, así que sé bueno. - Your parents are about to/feel tempted to ban you from going to the party, so behave. María está por dejar el curso y empezar a trabajar. - María has the intention of leaving the course and starting work. Estoy por prestarle yo el dinero a Carmen. Está pasando apuros económicos. - I feel tempted to lend Carmen the money. She is having financial problems. As you can see from the examples, you often find a pronoun attached to the end of the infinitive. The pronoun is not placed in front of the whole structure or in the middle. This would be incorrect: Le estoy por prestar el dinero a Carmen. Estoy le por prestar el dinero a Carmen. Estoy por le prestar el dinero a Carmen. The subject doesn't always have to be a person; if it's not a person but "something" or it is an impersonal sentence, we can still use estar por + infintive, meaning that there is something that is expected to happen soon/is about to happen soon. For example: ¡Uy! Mira ese cielo gris. Coge el paraguas porque está por llover. - Ugh! Look at that grey sky. Take the umbrella because it's going to rain soon. ¡Cuidado! ¡Esa estantería está por caerse! - Careful! That shelf is going to fall! Sometimes, to express that something is still [needed] to be done, we also use estar + por, for example: Estos documentos todavía están por revisar y firmar. No he tenido tiempo. - These documents still need to be reviewed and signed. I haven't had time. -Tu novia no te dejará venir con nosotros. -Eso está por ver. -Your girlfriend won't let you come with us. -We'll see about that. [lit: that is to be seen] Mi cita con el pediatra está por confirmar, pero no creo que haya problemas. - My appointment with the paediatrician is yet to be confirmed, but I don't think there'll be a problem.

Expressing instructions and general statements with the impersonal se = one

In Spanish we use the impersonal pronoun se as "one" in order to explain general statements. The verb is conjugated in the 3rd person singular. Se vive bien en Mérida. - One lives well in Merida. Se come bien en la playa. - One eats well at the beach. Se duerme mejor con la conciencia tranquila. - One sleeps better with a clear conscience. Se está a gusto aqui. - One is comfortable here.

Using para (not por) to express unequal relations/surprising facts

In Spanish we use the preposition para (not por) when we want to express a surprising fact in relation to a general statement. Have a look and listen to these examples: Para ser adolescente, ella es bastante responsable. - For a teenager, she is quite responsible. Here, the general statement is that all teenagers are irresponsible, however she is an exception. Para una universidad tan prestigiosa, los resultados no han sido muy buenos este año. - For such a prestigious university, the results haven't been very good this year. Here, the surprising fact is that the results have been bad, despite being considered generally as a very good university.

Using the diminutive suffix -illo, -cillo, -ecillo, -ececillo

In Spanish we use the suffixes -illo, -cillo or -ecillo after a noun or adjective for two purposes: to qualify it as smaller (diminutive) or to talk about it in an affectionate way. Suffix -illo, -illa, -illos, -illas Voy a sentarme debajo de este arbolillo para tener sombra.I am going to sit under this "little" tree to have some shade. Esta chiquilla es muy simpática.This "little" girl is very nice. Me gustan mucho esos cuadrillos de ahí.I really like those little paintings over there. Por favor, ¿nos trae unas jarrillas de agua?Please, can we have some little jugs of water? Notice how we modify the nouns: árbol → arbolillo chica → chiquilla (the -c- becomes -qu- for pronunciation purposes) cuadro → cuadrillos jarra → jarrillas If the original noun ends in -o or -a, it loses the vowel when you add the diminutive suffix (cuadro → cuadr-illos; jarra → jarr-illas) a consonant, it usually keeps the last letter (árbol → arbol-illo) Notice that the suffix matches the gender and number of the original noun: masculine or feminine, singular or plural. Suffix -cillo, -cilla, -cillos, -cillas When the noun ends in a consonant or the vowel -e we tend to keep the whole word and add -cillo, -cilla, -cillos, -cillas. Necesito un cafecillo para continuar el día.I need a little coffee to continue the day. La seriecilla sobre animales es fascinante.The "nice" series about animals is fascinating. Carlos está jugando con los camioncillos que le regalé.Carlos is playing with the little lorries that I gave him. ¿Hacía mucho calorcillo en Sevilla?Was it very hot in Seville? [softening the word "calor"] Mis hijos llevaron unos trajecillos muy elegantes a la boda.My sons wore some very smart little suits at the wedding. As you can see, these suffixes are not always used when talking about something that is physically smaller, but to talk about something in a more affectionate way or to soften the meaning of the word: ¿Hacía mucho calor en Sevilla? ¿Hacía mucho calorcillo en Sevilla? These sentences mean the same, but in the second one the speaker is softening the meaning of "heat". With this other example from above: La serie sobre los animales es fascinante. La seriecilla sobre los animales es fascinante. Here we are not talking about a TV series that is smaller or shorter, we are simply using the suffix -cilla meaning that is a "nice" series. Suffix -ecillo, -ecilla, -ecillos, -ecillas Monosyllabic words tend to use long suffixes instead. For example: Voy a sentarme al solecillo a broncearme.I am going to sit in the sun to get tanned. Compramos unos panecillos frescos en la panadería.We bought some fresh little bread rolls at the bakery. La pecera con los pececillos estaba en la esquina del salón.The fish tank with the little fish was in the corner of the living room. Notice that if the word ends in -z, (e.g. pez = fish) the -z becomes a -c. Sometimes with monosyllabic words we make this suffix even longer: -ececillo, -ececilla, -ececillos, -ececillas: El bebé jugaba con sus piececillos.The baby played with his little feet. Note: be aware that some nouns take on a new meaning when used with these suffixes. For example, the word "panecillo" could mean "a small piece of bread" but it is also the word for "a bread roll". Other examples with new meanings are: una camilla (a hospital bed, but also a small bed) una ventanilla (a counter or a ticket window -as found in a bank or train station- but also a small window) Bear in mind that with diminutives there is no strict rule for when to use -illo or -cillo (or the other different suffixes) but there are some tendencies.For example, we tend to use -illo with nouns ending in -l and we tend to use -cillo with nouns ending in -n, e.g. hotel/hotelillo, ángel/angelillo, papel/papelillo, camión/camioncillo, melón/meloncillo, corazón/corazoncillo.

Acabar de + [infinitive] = to have just done / just did something

In Spanish we use this verbal structure to express "To have just done [something]". Acabar (conjugated) de + Infinitivo Have a look and listen to the following examples in different tenses: Acabo de romper la mesa. - I have just broken the table. Nosotros acabábamos de comer cuando Sara llegó. - We had just eaten when Sara arrived. Usted acaba de comprar el viaje de sus sueños. - You have just bought your dream trip. Los jubilados acababan de llegar a Benidorm cuando empezó la tormenta. - The retirees had just arrived to Benidorm when the storm started. Notice how the preposition de always follows acabar. In Spanish, unlike in English, we do not use a participle (-ed form) but rather an infinitive after de. Acabo de llegar. - I have just arrived. Generally with this construction we use either El Presente or El Pretérito Imperfecto as you can see in the examples above. For "have just done something" use El Presente For "had just done something" use El Pretérito Imperfecto

Using Estar a punto de + [infinitive] = to be about to do something (perífrasis verbal)

In Spanish we use this verbal structure to say when a person is about to do [something]. Estar (conjugated) a punto de + Infinitivo Have a look and listen to the following examples in different tenses: Estoy a punto de aterrizar en Madrid.I am about to land in Madrid. Susana está a punto de llamarte.Susana is about to call you. Nosotros estábamos a punto de salir cuando llegó nuestra madre.We were about to leave when our mother arrived. Mis amigos estaban a punto de venir cuando sonó el teléfono.My friends were about to come when the telephone rang. Tú has estado a punto de entrar sin avisar.You were about to enter without warning. No creo que esté a punto de llover.I don't think it is about to rain. Bear in mind that although this verbal structure can be used in different tenses, when used in El Pretérito Perfecto it could also express an action that was "nearly done" but never happened. For example: He estado a punto de atropellar a un gato. I nearly ran over a cat (but I didn't).

Using cómo, dónde and cuándo in interrogative, exclamatory and indirect sentences

In Spanish when we want to ask questions or make exclamatory sentences that refer to how, when or where we use the interrogative adverbs: cómo (how) dónde (where) cuándo (when) Have a look and listen to the following examples: ¿Cómo has llegado hasta aquí?How did you get here? ¿Dónde celebrarás tu cumpleaños?Where will you celebrate your birthday? ¿Cuándo tienes el próximo examen?When are you having your next exam? ¡Cómo huele esa tortilla de patatas!This Spanish omelette smells delicious! [lit: How that Spanish omelette smells!] ¡Hasta cuándo vamos a aguantar a este gobierno!Until when are we going to put up with this government! As well as in interrogative sentences, they are also used with the same forms in indirect questions: Ella no sabe cómo ha llegado hasta aquí.She doesn't know how she got here. Marcos le está preguntando dónde celebrará su cumpleaños.Marcos is asking her where she will celebrate her birthday. Susana quiere saber cuándo va a tener el próximo examen.Susana wants to know when she is going to have her next exam. Note that in both types of sentences above they all have a written accent [´].

Using ser+preposition para (not estar) to indicate a recipient

In Spanish when we want to say who something is for we use the verb ser followed by the preposition para. Have a look and listen to these examples: El regalo es para mi madre.The present is for my mum. Las flores son para Carlota.The flowers are for Carlota. ¿Esa carta es para ti?Is that letter for you?

Using poder to say could have [done something] (modal verbs)

In Spanish, "could have [done something]" is expressed in 3 different ways. They all refer to when someone had a chance to do something in the past but missed the opportunity: Poder in El Pretérito Indefinido + El Infinitivo Compuesto Poder in El Pretérito Imperfecto + El Infinitivo Compuesto Poder in El Condicional Simple + El Infinitivo Compuesto Have a look at the following example with the 3 different tenses but all referring to the same thing: Gabriela pudo haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue. - Gabriela could have gone to Exeter university but she didn't go. Gabriela podía haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue. - Gabriela could have gone to Exeter university but she didn't go. Gabriela podría haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue. - Gabriela could have gone to Exeter university but she didn't go. The three different tenses are interchangeable, the meaning does not change no matter which one you use. They all refer to what could have happened in the past (but didn't). Here are more examples: Me podrías haber avisado para ir a recogerte a la estación. - You could have told me so I could go pick you up at the station. Pudimos haber ido a la playa en vez de a la montaña. - We could have gone to the beach instead of the mountains. Podíais haber recogido la casa antes de la llegada de los invitados. - You could have tidied up the house before the guests arrived. Ellos podrían haber organizado mejor el viaje porque fue un desastre. - They could have organised the trip better because it was a disaster.

Using quisiera for I would like (alternative to querría)

In Spanish, El Condicional Simple and El Imperfecto Subjuntivo of the verb "querer" are equivalent in sentences where the speaker requires extra politeness. Therefore, in formal situations, for example in a restaurant, the waiter could say: ¿Quisiera usted otra copa de vino, señor? - Would you like another glass of wine, sir? ¿Querría otra copa de vino, señor? - Would you like another glass of wine, sir? Or in a bank you could say: Quisiera abrir una cuenta bancaria. - I would like to open a bank account. Querría abrir una cuenta bancaria. - I would like to open a bank account. Even though "quisiera" is not the conditional form but El Imperfecto Subjuntivo, we still use this form as if it were the conditional (would). Both forms are equally correct, accepted, and formal. These two forms can also be used in other more general situations simply to say "I would like to do something". Here are some examples: Yo quisiera dedicar más tiempo a mis hijos, pero estoy tan ocupada... - I would like to dedicate more time to my children, but I am so busy... Mis padres querrían comprar una casa en la playa. - My parents would like to buy a house at the beach. No creo que ella quisiera casarse conmigo. - I don't think she would want to marry me. No querría interrumpiros en este momento, pero es algo urgente. - I didn't want to interrupt you right now, but it's something urgent.

Position of adjectives in Spanish

In Spanish, adjectives can be placed either before or after the noun they modify. 1. Noun + adjective Read and listen to these examples: Tú vas a comprar un ordenador japonés. - You are going to buy a Japanese computer. Tengo una camisa roja. - I have a red shirt. Laura y Eva comieron platos picantes. - Laura and Eva ate spicy dishes. Nosotros escuchamos canciones relajantes. - We listened to relaxing songs. In the examples above, the adjective is placed after the noun. It describes a noun and attributes a quality to it that differentiates it. For example, the adjective japonés makes a distinction between "Japanese computers" and computers from other countries. Noun + adjective is the most common order for adjectives in Spanish. 2. Adjective + noun Now, read and listen to these examples: La blanca nieve era preciosa en invierno. - The white snow was lovely in winter. Había un charco de roja sangre en el suelo. - There was a puddle of red blood on the floor. Nos encantó ese dulce pastel de chocolate. - We loved that sweet chocolate cake. Los campos españoles producen verdes lechugas de calidad. - Spanish lands produce green lettuces of quality. In the examples above, the adjective is placed before the noun. The adjective is not describing the noun in order to differentiate it, instead it is expressing that this quality is naturally associated with the noun it modifies. For example, la nieve, la sangre and las lechugas have characteristic colours, so the adjectives are emphasising them, but not differentiating them from other nouns. Adjective + noun is rarely heard in spoken Spanish, but it can be seen in literary texts to emphasise characteristics. 3. Meaning depends on the order However, there are other times when the meaning of the adjective changes, depending on its position before or after the noun. Read and listen to these examples: Aquel hombre pobre no tiene dinero. - That poor man doesn't have money. (penniless) Aquel pobre hombre era muy desgraciado. - That poor man was very unfortunate. (pitiable) ¿Sabías que Rubén tiene una moto nueva? - Did you know that Rubén has a new motorbike? (brand-new) ¿Sabías que Rubén tiene una nueva moto? - Did you know that Rubén has a new motorbike? (a replacement) In the examples above, the adjectives nueva and pobre change their meaning depending on their position before or after the noun.

Using the diminutive suffix -ito, -ita, -itos and -itas with words ending in -o/-a/-io/-ia

In Spanish, instead of adding the adjective pequeño (= small or little), we can use the diminutive suffix -ito, -ita, -itos or -itas. The suffix not only indicates a diminutive size, but in some cases, it can add a nuance of affection, or soften the meaning of the actual word. With words ending in -o, -a, -io and -ia, the rule is to remove these endings and replace with the suffix. With nouns and adjectives the suffix needs agreement in gender and number. Have a look: Masc sing Fem sing Masc pl Fem pl -ito -ita -itos -itas Read and listen to these examples: El pajarito voló del nido.The little bird flew from its nest. [pájaro → pajarito] La mesita es verde.The little table is green. [mesa → mesita] Los libritos de vocabulario eran muy útiles.The little vocabulary books were very useful. [libros → libritos] Las lamparitas del salón lucen bastante bien.The little lamps in the living room shine quite well. [lámpara → lamparitas] Tienes la cara morenita.Your face is (nicely) tanned. [morena → morenita, softened] Mi sobrino es muy bajito.My nephew is very short. [bajo → bajito, affectionate] However, withadverbs, we only use the suffix-itoor-ita. Adverbs ending in -o take the -ito suffix. Adverbs ending in -a take the -ita suffix. Have a look and listen to these examples: ¡Come despacio!Eat slowly! ¡Come despacito!Eat slowly! Te espero afuera.I'll wait for you outside. Te espero afuerita.I'll wait for you outside. In the second and fourth examples, the words slowly (despacio) and outside (afuera) are softened and used affectionately with the addition of the suffix (despacito - afuerita). Sometimes adding the suffix to the word requires a spelling change to maintain the original sound of the word, or to apply orthographic rules, as with words ending in -co, -go or -zo. Have a look and listen to these examples: poco = a bit Dame un poquito de agua, por favor.Can I have a little bit of water please? abrigo = coat Tu abriguito está en la percha.Your little coat is on the peg. trozo = a piece Voy a tomar un trocito de ese pastel.I'm going to have a little piece of that cake. We change from trozo to trocito because in Spanish we use the letter z only followed by a, o and u, but not with e or i.

Using the diminutive suffix -cito, -cita, -citos and -citas with words ending in -e, -n, and -r

In Spanish, instead of adding the adjective pequeño (small or little), we can use the diminutive suffix -cito, -cita, ‑citos or -citas with most words that end in -e, -n or -r. The suffix not only indicates a diminutive size, but in some cases, it can add a nuance of affection, or soften the meaning of the actual word. With words ending in -e, -n or -r, the rule is generally to add these endings to the word: Have a look: Masc sing Fem sing Masc pl Fem pl -cito -cita -citos -citas Read and listen to these examples: En la plaza de mi pueblo hay una fuentecita de piedra.There is a little stone fountain in my village main square. Más adelante verás una callecita estrecha.Further on you will see a narrow little street. El parque está muy verdecito.The park is very green. Puedes acariciar al perro suavecito.You can stroke the dog softly. He comprado un camioncito de juguete a mi sobrino.I bought a toy little lorry for my nephew. Voy a ver a mi amorcito esta tarde.I am seeing my love this afternoon. Notice how this suffix applies to nouns (fuente, calle, camión, amor), adjectives (verde) and adverbs (suave). Here are some plural examples: Mi hijo juega con sus cochecitos todo el tiempo.My son plays with his little cars all the time. Hay dos parquecitos con columpios cerca de aquí.There are two small playgrounds with swings around here. Tus plantas parecen muy verdecitas y sanas.Your plants look very green and healthy. An exeption to this rule is the diminutive for caliente (hot): it loses its central -i- and final -e and uses the suffix -ito:

Forming the imperative of tú/ vosotros/vosotras (negative commands)

In Spanish, negative commands for tú and vosotros/-as, take the same form as their conjugation in El Presente de Subjuntivo. e.g Antonio, ¡no seas egoísta! - Antonio, don't be selfish! ¡No llegues tarde esta noche! - Don't be late tonight! e.g ¡No comáis tanta pizza! - Don't eat so much pizza! ¡No seáis tan cabezotas! - Don't be so stubborn! This does not apply to affirmative commands

Se aspectual

In Spanish, particularly in conversational Spanish, we often use verbs that are not traditionally pronominal with a reflexive pronoun. This is called "se aspectual." While this doesn't dramatically change the meaning of the verb, there is always an element of subjectivity in the pronominal form. The way the listener sees the action is different with the se aspectual. It expresses the culmination/completion of an action, for example with verbs like comer or beber. Laura comió una manzana. - Laura ate an apple. Laura se comió una manzana. - Laura ate up an apple. Ha bebido cerveza. - He has drunk beer. ¿Te has bebido la cerveza? - Have you drunk the [whole] beer? Although the meaning is similar, comer simply states what happened and focuses more on the action, whilst comerse adds the nuance of culmination/completion of the action. This sense of culmination is often expressed in English with a preposition (eat up, drink up). The listener perceives these two sentences in a slightly different way. The se aspectual is also used with perception and knowledge verbs to indicate this same sense of culmination/completion, for example: Javier leyó el libro que le di. - Javier read the book I gave him. Javier se leyó el libro que le di. - Javier read the book I gave him. [implying he finished it] Ayer estudiamos un tema muy interesante. - Yesterday we studied a very interesting topic. Nos estudiamos el tema en 20 minutos. - We studied the [whole] topic in 20 minutes. Hemos aprendido muchas cosas en el colegio. - We've learned many things in school. ¿Os habéis aprendido la lección? - Have you learned the [whole] lesson? In the examples above, the verbs that are not using the se aspectual convey more of an open-ended action, while the examples that use the se aspectual imply an implicit end moment.

Using conjunction al + infinitive/perfect infinitive = when doing/ because of doing [something]

In Spanish, the conjunction al followed by an infinitive is used in clauses that express either When/while doing [something] or Because of doing [something]. When/while doing something: Al calentar la leche, me quemé. - When I was heating up the milk, I burned myself. Se ha desmayado al leer la noticia. - She fainted while reading the news. Because of doing something Al terminar la sesión antes de lo previsto, pudimos volver a casa antes. - Because the session finished earlier than expected, we were able to return home earlier. Al portarse tan mal, lo expulsaron del colegio. - Due to his appalling behaviour, he was expelled from school. Bear in mind that in the second example, where the al + infinitive structure expresses the cause of something happening, al could also be followed by haber + participle, if it is referring to a past action. See El Infinitivo Compuesto. Have a look at the previous examples but using the El Infinitivo Compuesto: Al haber terminado la sesión antes de lo previsto, pudimos volver a casa antes. - As the session finished earlier than expected, we were able to return home earlier. Al haberse portado tan mal, lo expulsaron del colegio. - Due to his appalling behaviour, he was expelled from school. Using the Infinitivo or El Infinitivo Compuesto does not change the meaning of the sentence, therefore they are interchangeable.

Feminine nouns starting with a stressed "a" sometimes use masculine articles and quantifiers

In Spanish, the definite article "el" is generally used for masculine nouns and the definite article "la" for feminine nouns. For example: "El coche" (The car) "La casa" (The house) However there are some feminine nouns in Spanish that use the masculine singular article "el". Feminine nouns that start with a stressed "a" (or "ha-") use the masculine singular definite article. With other articles and quantifiers other rules apply. Here are two examples; both nouns are feminine and start with the letter a but only the one where the stress is on the first syllable takes the masculine singular article el: El arpa. - The harp. The noun arpa is stressed on the first a. La amapola. - The poppy. The noun amapola is stressed on the third syllable. The rule doesn't apply. With the Artículo definido For pronunciation reasons, feminine nouns that start with a stressed "a" (or "ha-") take the masculine singular definite article el (not la): El agua. - The water. El ala. - The wing. The feminine singular definite article would be difficult to pronounce: La agua La ala Using the feminine singular article is incorrect. However, when using the plural definite article these words DO take las (not los). Las aguas. The waters. Las alas. The wings. This is because there is no pronunciation difficulty when using the feminine plural article. With the Artículo indefinido With the indefinite articles un/una (= a singular), although un is more commonly used, una is also acceptable and not considered incorrect. Un agua. - A water. (Referring to a bottle of water for example) Un ala. - A wing. Una agua. - A water. Una ala. - A wing. Both plural articles unos/unas are also acceptable. Unos aguas. Unas aguas. - Some waters. Unos alas. Unas alas - Some wings. Be careful because if there is an adjective between the article and the noun, then everything reverts to the feminine form! La clara agua. - The clear water. Una buena hacha. - A good axe. With parts of speech like the Adjetivo demostrativo, the Adjetivo posesivo or the Adjetivo indefinido, their feminine singular and plural form is used. For example: Esta agua. Estas aguas. - This water. These waters. Este agua/ Estos aguas. Mucha agua. Muchas aguas. - A lot of water. Lots of waters. Mucho agua/Muchos aguas. Nuestra agua. Nuestras aguas. - Our water. Our waters. Nuestro agua/Nuestros aguas. Exceptions: The names of the letters -h- (hache) and -a- (a) are exceptions to this rule. They are feminine nouns but they DO take la, (not el). La hache.

Using poder to say could [do something] for polite requests and suggestions (conditional simple)

In Spanish, the modal verb poder is generally used in El Condicional Simple in these two contexts: telling someone what they could do in the future in the form of advice. asking someone politely to do something. For example: Podrías hablar con la jefa y explicarle la situación.You could talk to the boss and explain the situation to her. [suggestion/advice] ¿Podríais hablar más bajo por favor? No puedo concentrarme.Could you lower your voice please? I can't concentrate. [polite request] More examples: -Creo que he sido un poco antipático con Luisa. -Pues podrías llamarla y disculparte.-I think I was a bit rude to Luisa. -Well, you could call her and apologise. ¿Podrías coger mi maleta de ahí arriba por favor? Yo no llego.Could you get my suitcase from up there please? I can't reach. -No sé qué hacer para convencerte. -Podrías invitarme a cenar al Ritz.-I don't know what to do to persuade you. -You could take me to the Ritz for dinner. Señor, ¿podría usted mover su silla hacia un lado?Sir, could you move your chair to the side? Poder in El Condicional Simple + Infinitivo

Para que followed by El Presente de Subjuntivo (purpose subordinate clauses)

In Spanish, the most commonly used connective to introduce a purpose clause (La oración subordinada de finalidad) is "para que...". It introduces a clause expressing the purpose of the main clause. This connective is always followed by the subjunctive, not the indicative. Here we will explain how "para que" is used with El Presente de Subjuntivo. To see how "para que" works with El Imperfecto Subjuntivo see this lesson about subordinate clauses Para que followed by El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo (purpose subordinate clauses). Para que... + El Presente de Subjuntivo To use it with El Presente de Subjuntivo, we need the present tense, the present continuous tense or the perfect tense in the main clause. Have a look at the following examples: Siempre llego temprano a la oficina para que mi jefa piense que soy muy puntual.I always arrive early to the office so that my boss thinks I am punctual. Repasamos inglés cada día para que el exámen final no resulte demasiado difícil.We revise [US: review] English every day so that the final exam won't be too difficult. Miguel ha arreglado toda la casa para que su mujer descanse hoy.Miguel has tidied up the whole house so that his wife has a rest today. Estoy enviando un mensaje a Luis para que venga a recogerme a las 10.I am sending Luis a message so that he comes to pick me up at 10. If the main clause is in El Pretérito Perfecto, then both El Presente de Subjuntivo and El Imperfecto Subjuntivo can be used after para que: He salido antes del trabajo para que podamos comer juntos. (El Presente de Subjuntivo)I left work early so that we can/could eat together. He salido antes del trabajo para que pudiéramos comer juntos. (El Imperfecto Subjuntivo)I left work early so that we can/could eat together. Important: The subject in the main clause and the subject in the subordinate clause must be different in order to use the subjunctive. If the subject is the same in both clauses then you must use the infinitive after "para" (without "que"). Have a look at these two different sentences: Same subjects: Yo me siento en primera fila para poder verte mejor.I'm sitting in the first row so that I can see you better. Different subjects: Yo me siento en primera fila para que tú me puedas ver mejor.I'm sitting in the first row so that you can see me better.

Para que followed by El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo (purpose subordinate clauses)

In Spanish, the most commonly used connective to introduce a purpose clause (La oración subordinada de finalidad) is "para que...". It introduces a clause expressing the purpose of the main clause. This connective is always followed by the subjunctive, not the indicative. To see how "para que" works with El Presente de Subjuntivo see this lesson about subordinate clauses Using adverbial clauses para que, antes (de) que, hasta que, con tal (de) que, etc. + El Presente de Subjuntivo (present subjunctive). Here we will explain how "para que" is used with El Imperfecto Subjuntivo. Para que... + El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo To use it with El Imperfecto Subjuntivo, we need a past tense in the main clause. Have a look at the following examples: Le regalé el diccionario para que lo usara en clase.I gave him the dictionary for him to use it in class / so that he'd use it in class. Blanca estaba organizando un viaje para que tuvieran una segunda luna de miel.Blanca was organising a trip so that they'd have a second honey moon. Me sujetaba del brazo para que yo no pudiese escapar.He was holding my arm so that I couldn't escape. If the main clause is in El Pretérito Perfecto, then both El Presente de Subjuntivo and El Imperfecto Subjuntivo can be used after para que: He salido antes del trabajo para que podamos comer juntos. (El Presente de Subjuntivo)I left work early so that we can/could eat together. He salido antes del trabajo para que pudiéramos comer juntos. (El Imperfecto Subjuntivo)I left work early so that we can/could eat together. Important: The subject in the main clause and in the subordinate clase must be different for the use of subjunctive. If the subject is the same in both clauses then we will need the infinitive after "para" (without "que"). Have a look at these two different sentences: Same subjects: Me senté en primera fila para ver mejor el partido.I sat in the first row so that I could see the match better. Different subjects: Me senté en primera fila para que tú me vieras mejor.I sat in the first row so that you could see me better. Other connectives that introduce purpose are: con el fin de que... a fin de que... a que... con el objeto de que... con el propósito de que...

Yo que tú / Si yo fuera tú / Yo de ti for If I were you

In Spanish, to express "if I were you" we normally use one of the following structures: Si yo fuera tú... Yo que tú... Yo de ti... Si yo fuera tú translates literally as "if I were you". It uses the verb ser in El Imperfecto Subjuntivo. The other two structures that do not include a verb are more idiomatic and are used in more colloquial contexts. They all mean the same and are used in hypothetical sentences followed by a clause using El Condicional Simple or El Condicional Perfecto. Here are some examples: Si yo fuera tú llamaría a la policía ahora mismo.If I were you I'd call the police right now. Si yo fuera tú lo habría dejado plantado en el altar.If I were you I'd have left him waiting at the altar. Yo que tú me disculparía antes de que sea tarde.If I were you I'd apologise before it's too late. Yo que tú le habría dicho la verdad.If I were you I'd have told him the truth. Yo de ti hablaría con ellos para aclarar las cosas.If I were you I'd talk to them to clarify things. Yo de ti habría aceptado su oferta.If I were you I'd have accepted their offer. Each construction is a set phrase, be careful not to mix them up. For example, yo que tú and yo de ti do not start with "si" (if): Si yo de ti no iría. Yo que ti no iría. Yo de tú no iría. (all the above are incorrect) Bear in mind that this type of hypothetical sentence, also accepts El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto de Subjuntivo (instead of El Condicional Perfecto). For example: Yo de ti hubiera aceptado su oferta.If I were you I'd have accepted their offer. There are similar phrases with the same meaning that can also be used, for example: Si yo estuviera en tu lugar/en tu situación... Si dependiera de mí...

Using definite articles + mismo to say "the same"

In Spanish, to express "the same" we can use: El mismo / La misma /Los mismos/ Las mismas Which one to use depends on the gender of the thing/person you are talking about, and also on whether it is singular or plural. Have a look and listen to these examples: Nosotros tenemos el mismo coche que los vecinos.We have the same car as the neighbours. -Este profesor es diferente al del otro día. -No, es el mismo.-This teacher is different to the one from the other day. -No, it's the same [one]. Notice how "el mismo" is used to talk about masculine singular things/people. (el coche, el profesor) Andrea lleva la misma camisa que llevaba ayer.Andrea is wearing the same shirt she was wearing yesterday. No me cuentes de nuevo la misma historia.Don't tell me the same story again. In the examples above "la misma" is used to talk about feminine singular things/people. (la camisa, la historia) Tenemos zapatos parecidos pero no son los mismos.We have similar shoes but they are not the same. Tú y yo tenemos las mismas aficiones.You and I have the same hobbies. See how, in the examples above, we use "los mismos" to refer to a masculine plural noun (zapatos) and "las mismas" to refer to a feminine plural noun (aficiones). But, To refer to a neutral ideal (the same thing) use: Lo mismo For example: Marcos y Gerardo han estudiado lo mismo en la universidad.Marcos and Gerardo studied the same [thing] at university. No es lo mismo ver una película en el cine que ver una película en casa.Watching a film in the cinema and watching a film at home is not the same [thing]. In this case it is always used in the neutral form (lo mismo) Igual/Iguales Don't get confused with the word igual. Although used in a very similar way, we will use igual/iguales when we refer to being alike/identical more than being the same thing. For example: "Esas dos chicas son iguales." (Those two girls are identical.) In this case the two girls may look very similar physically or you may refer to their very similar personality. Also note that in this case igual/iguales agree in number but they don't have articles (el,la,las,los) "Esas dos chicas son las iguales."

Using ir in El Pretérito Imperfecto to express was/were going to [do something]

In Spanish, to express "was/were going to [do something]" in order to talk about: actions that were going to happen actions that were about to happen planned actions or events we use: Verb ir in El Pretérito Imperfecto + a + infinitive Have a look at some examples: Yo iba a coger el autobús pero he decidido ir andando. - I was going to take the bus but I decided to go on foot. Mi hermano iba a estudiar medicina pero a última hora cambió de opinión. - My brother was going to study medicine but he had a last minute change of heart. -¿Vienes al cine conmigo? -Bueno, yo iba a tomar café con Marta. -Do you want to come to the cinema with me? -Well, I was planning on having coffee with Marta. Tengo que quedarme hasta las tres. ¡Qué pena! Iba a llamar a Carmen para ir a tapear. - I have to stay until three. What a pity! I was about to call Carmen to have some tapas. As you can see, sometimes this structure is used to simply say what you were going to do, what you were about to do, or what you had planned to do. Notice in this example that despite using El Pretérito Imperfecto which is a past tense we are referring to a "future" event. -¿Vienes al cine conmigo? -Bueno, yo iba a tomar café con Marta. -Do you want to come to the cinema with me? -Well, I was planning on having coffee with Marta. Despite literally saying "I was going to" it means it "is going to happen". A common mistake is to use the literal translation of "was going to" with: estaba yendo a /era yendo a instead of "iba a"

Using otro, otra, otros, otras to say another, other (indefinite adjectives)

In Spanish, to express another or other we use the indefinite adjective otro. It agrees in gender and number with the noun it accompanies: Indefinite Adjective MasculineFeminine Singular otroanotherotraanother Plural otrosother otrasother Have a look and listen to the following examples: Voy a comprar otra lámpara. Esta no me gusta.I am going to buy another lamp. I don't like this one. Necesitas otro sombrero.You need another hat. Debes salir con otros chicos.You must hang out with other boys. Mi hija prefiere otras asignaturas.My daughter prefers other subjects. Be careful! A very common mistake is to add un or una in front of otro/otra: Por favor, otra cerveza.Por favor, una otra cerveza.Please, (can I have) another beer.

Using volver a + [infinitive] to express repetition of an action (perífrasis verbal)

In Spanish, to express that "an action is repeated", i.e. takes place again, we can use this verbal structure: Volver (conjugated) a + Infinitivo We use it in different tenses. Bear in mind that when it is used in the present tense, it expresses a "future" action. Look at the following examples: Yo vuelvo a trabajar en esa tienda este verano.I am working again in that shop this summer. Si vuelves a llamarme engreída, me voy a enfadar contigo.If you call me vain again, I will be cross with you. No hemos vuelto a ver a Susana.We haven't seen Susana again. El coche volvió a derrapar en la segunda curva.The car skidded again around the second curve. No voy a volver a pisar ese bar nunca.I am not going to set foot in that bar ever again. Notice how when "Volver a" is used in this idiomatic way, the verb volver loses its literal meaning (to "physically" go back, return somewhere). The main verb in the infinitive is the one that carries the meaning in the sentence. Look at the difference: Claudia volvió al teatro. Claudia returned to the theatre [literally].Claudia volvió a trabajar en el teatro. Claudia worked at the theatre again, went back to work at the theatre. Don't forget the preposition "a".

Using aquel, aquella, aquellos, aquellas for that one (over there), those ones (over there) and that (over there) (demonstrative pronouns)

In Spanish, to express that (over there), that one (over there) or those ones (over there) we use the demonstrative pronouns: aquel, aquella, aquellos, aquellas and aquello. Like all pronouns they do not accompany a noun. The noun they refer to has been mentioned before, either in the same or a previous sentence. Have a look and listen to these examples: Me encanta este vestido, pero prefiero aquel. - I like this dress, but I prefer that one (over there.) No te gustó esa falda, sino aquella. - You didn't like that skirt, but that one (over there) instead. Alicia no se acuerda de esos alumnos. Ella se acuerda de aquellos. - Alicia doesn't remember those pupils. She remembers those ones (over there.) Tania y Margarita no tenían estas joyas. Ellas tenían aquellas. - Tania and Margarita didn't have these jewels. They had those ones (over there.) The pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun they are referring to: Singular (that one) (over there) aquel aquella Plural (those ones) (over there) aquellos aquellas Referring to an idea When the pronoun is referring to an idea, then we use the neutral pronoun aquello, and there is only one form. You could translate it as "it" or "that". Have a look and listen to the following examples: Aquello no es plato de buen gusto.It's not everyone's cup of tea. Aquello me tiene un poco preocupado.It's got me a bit worried.

Using por poco/casi/un poco más y + present tense for nearly/almost

In Spanish, to express that something nearly/almost happened we often use: por poco + El Presente casi +El Presente un poco más y + El Presente We use the present tense in the indicative even though it refers to an action in the past. Sometimes it refers to actions that has almost just happened. Let's see some examples: Anoche, cuando subía las escaleras, por poco me caigo - .Last night, when I was going upstairs, I almost fell over. Anoche, cuando subía las escaleras, casi me caigo. - Last night, when I was going upstairs, I almost fell over . Anoche, cuando subía las escaleras, un poco más y me caigo. - Last night, when I was going upstairs, I almost fell over. Notice how in Spanish we use El Presente, not the past tense when using por poco, casi and un poco más y. They are all invariable expressions. More examples: Por poco se me escapa el secreto y se lo digo a mamá. - I almost gave away the secret and [almost] told mum En el concierto del sábado casi nos desmayamos al ver a Ariana Grande. - At the concert on Saturday we nearly fainted when we saw Ariana Grande. Un poco más y nos detienen por beber alcohol en un lugar público. - We nearly got arrested for drinking alcohol in a public space. Con tanta comida en la boca por poco te ahogas. - With so much food in your mouth you nearly choked. ¡Uy! un poco más y te echo la cerveza encima del vestido. - Whoa! I almost spilt my beer on your dress. Casi no llego a mi cita a tiempo. No he escuchado el despertador esta mañana. - I almost missed my appointment. I didn't hear the alarm this morning.

How to say "to love something/doing something"

In Spanish, to express that you "love (something)" or you "love doing (something)" we use verb encantar. Encantar works in exactly the same way gustar does. To love something Have a look at these examples: Me encanta el chocolate.I love chocolate. Me encantan las fresas.I love strawberries. Notice how the order is different in English and Spanish. In English: Subject (I) + verb (love) + what is loved (chocolate/strawberries) In Spanish: Pronombre de complemento indirecto (Me) + verb (encanta/n) + subject (el chocolate/las fresas) To love doing something If you want to express "you love doing something" you only use "encanta" and not encantan: Me encanta nadar en el mar.I love swimming in the sea. Me encanta tomar el sol.I love sunbathing. Notice how what you like is expressed with an infinitive (-ar,-er,-ir form), not a gerund like in English (-ing form). To express more intensity about how much you like something you can use alternative verbs. For example: Apasionar (to be passionate about) Me apasiona la música clásica.I am passionate about classic music. Me apasionan las novelas de Agatha Christie.I am passionate about Agatha Christie's novels. Fascinar (to be fascinated by) Me fascina hacer alpinismo.I am fascinated by mountaineering. Me fascinan las actrices de Hollywood.I am fascinated by Hollywood actresses. Apasionar and fascinar work exactly the same way verb gustar works. They can be used in any tense and will always be conjugated in the 3rd person singular or plural. They are accompanied by indirect object pronouns (me, te, le, nos, os, les) which tells us "who" is doing the liking, loving, being passionate or fascinated. Here are other examples using different pronouns: Entonces, ¿te apasionan los animales?So, you are passionate about animals? Alberto es un chico interesante. Le fascina la moda italiana.Alberto is an interesting guy. He is fascinated by Italian fashion. Nos apasionan los coches de carrera.We are passionate about racing cars. Les fascina hacer buceo.They are fascinated by scuba diving.

Using ese, esa, esos, esas, eso for that one, those ones and that (demonstrative pronouns)

In Spanish, to express that, that one or those ones we use the demonstrative pronouns: ese, esa, esos, esas and eso. Like all pronouns they do not accompany a noun. The noun they refer to has been mentioned before, either in the same or a previous sentence. Have a look and listen to these examples: En general me gustan los coches, pero ese me encanta.In general I like cars, but I love that one. Las faldas en esta tienda son bonitas; ¿Te gusta esa?They have nice skirts in this shop; do you like that one? Muchos profesores del colegio son antipáticos, pero esos sonríen mucho.Lots of teachers from the school are unpleasant, but those ones smile a lot. Entre las amigas de Julia, esas son íntimas.Among Julia's friends, those ones are close friends. The pronouns agree in gender and number with the noun they are refering to, this way: Masculine Feminine Singular (that one) ese esa Plural (those ones) esos esas When the pronoun is referring to an idea, then we use the neutral pronoun eso, and there is only one form. You could translate it as "that/that thing". Have a look and listen to the following examples: Eso me parece una tontería.That strikes me as being nonsense. Eso no es una excusa para llegar tarde.That is not an excuse for being late.

Using estar hecho de or ser de to indicate what something is made of

In Spanish, to indicate the material an object is made of we can use verb ser or estar, but in slightly different ways. Read and listen to these examples: La casa es de madera. - The house is (made of) wood. La casa está hecha de madera. - The house is made of wood. El jersey es de algodón. - The jumper is (made of) cotton. El jersey está hecho de algodón. - The jumper is made of cotton. Notice how ser is followed by de, however estar is followed by hecho de. The word hecho acts as an adjective, it needs to agree with the noun it is modifying. Have a look at the following examples: Las luces son de cristal. - The lights are (made of) glass. Las luces están hechas de cristal. - The lights are made of glass. El escritorio es de aglomerado. - The desk is (made of) chipboard. El escritorio está hecho de aglomerado. - The desk is made of chipboard. Las sillas son de madera de pino. - The chairs are (made of) pinewood. Las sillas están hechas de madera de pino. - The chairs are made of pinewood. To ask about what something is made of, you can also use both verbs. Have a look and listen: ¿De qué es la figura? -De porcelana. - What is the figurine made of? -China. ¿De qué está hecha la figura? -De porcelana. - What is the figurine made of? -China. Notice that for the questions, the preposition de comes first.

Using otro, otra, otros, otras to say another/another one, other, others (indefinite pronouns)

In Spanish, to say another / another one or other / others we use the indefinite pronoun otro. As a pronoun, it refers to a noun that has been mentioned before. It agrees in gender and number with the previously-mentioned noun: Have a look and listen to the following examples: No me gusta ese bolso de piel. Prefiero otro.I don't like that leather handbag. I prefer another one. La silla de madera está rota. Puedes sentarte en esta otra.The wooden chair is broken. You can sit on this other one. Tus amigos están todos lejos. Tienes que buscar otros.Your friends are all far away. You need to look for [some] other ones. El gato ha arañado las cortinas. Necesito comprar otras.The cat has scratched the curtains. I need to buy others. Be careful! A very common mistake is to add un or una in front of otro/otra: -¿Quieres otro vino? -Sí, por favor, otro.-¿Quieres otro vino? -Sí, por favor, un otro.-Would you like another [glass of] wine? -Yes, please, another one. We also use otros in the masculine plural form to refer to other people in general or others, even if we haven't mentioned them before. For example: Mis ideas no coinciden con otros casi nunca.My ideas hardly ever coincide with [those of] others.

-uar verbs in El Presente de Subjuntivo (actuar, continuar)

In Spanish, verbs that end in -uar take a written accent on the -u in most El Presente de Subjuntivo conjugations. Take a look at these two common verbs ending in -uar: actuar (to act / perform) and continuar (to continue) Here are some examples: Es posible que actúe en la representación de navidad del colegio.I may play a part (act) in the Nativity play at school. Espero que todos actuemos de forma cordial en la reunión de mañana.I hope we all proceed (act) in a cordial way tomorrow at the meeting. Será mejor que continuéis con vuestro trabajo.You'd better continue with your work. Quiero que continúen con su excelente labor.I want you to continue with your excellent work. The verb in the infinitive has the stress on the -ar at the end of the word: actu-ar, continu-ar. However, when it is conjugated in El Presente de Subjuntivo, the stress is on the -u- for all forms except the nosotros and vosotros forms. For example: actúe, actúes, actúes, actúen / continúe, continúes, continúe, continúen. In the nosotros and vosotros forms, the stress is on the -e at the end of the verb: actuemos, actuéis / continuemos, continuéis. Other examples with verbs evaluar, insinuar, tatuar: No es conveniente que insinúes que ella es la culpable de todo.It isn't convenient that you insinuate that it is completely her fault. Es esencial que evaluemos la situación con mucha precisión.It's essential that we evaluate the situation with a lot of precision. No me parece buena idea que os tatuéis los brazos.I don't think it's a good idea that you get your arms tattooed. Here is a list of Verbs ending in -uar Important: Not all verbs that end in -uar follow this rule. For example, some verbs that end in -cuar allow for spellings both (e.g. licuar, adecuar, promiscuar) with and without the written accent, and verbs that end in -guar do not need extra accents at all! They are conjugated like regular -ar verbs. Important: For verbs ending in -guar, like averiguar or apaciguar, their conjugation in El Presente de Subjuntivo has a diéresis on the letter u [ü], that's the name of the symbol formed by the two dots above the letter. In Spanish, the diéresis is only used with the letter u. Omitting it is a spelling mistake. The diéresis on the u means that the letter u must be pronounced (it's not a silence u like in guerra or Guernica) Cuando averigües lo que pasa, avísame.When you find out what's going on, let me know.

Using El Presente to order, advise or make a request

In Spanish, we can use El Presente to offer advice or make an order or request, in a colloquial way. Have a look a the following examples: Niños, os ponéis los abrigos y nos vamos. - Boys, put on your coats and let's go. Ahora vas al bar y buscas a tu padre, por favor. - Go to the bar now and look for your dad. This is using the present tense to make order or request. -Carmen está enfadada. -Pues vas y hablas con ella. -Carmen is upset. -Well, go and talk to her. This is using the present tense to offer advice. This use of the present is colloquial. It is an alternative to using El Imperativo, for example: "¡Ve al bar y busca a tu padre!" (Imperative) "Vas al bar y buscas a tu padre." (Present)

Acordar vs Acordarse (pronominal verbs)

In Spanish, we can use the verb acordar with or without a reflexive pronoun. It has a different meaning depending on how it is used. Let's see some examples: Acordar = to agree [to do something] / to come to an agreement When we use the verb acordar without a reflexive pronoun, it expresses an agreement with someone, i.e., to come to a conclusion after some discussion. Los socios acordaron invertir más en tecnología para la empresa.The associates agreed to invest more in technology for the company. Ayer acordé con mi jefe que haría algunas horas extra este mes.Yesterday my boss and I agreed that I'd do some extra time this month. [lit: I agreed with my boss...] It is generally followed by an infinitive, but it could also be used with the preposition "con" if the person the agreement is with is mentioned. Note that this use of acordar for agreeing is slightly formal. In a more colloquial way we'd probably use quedar en algo. For example: Verónica y yo acordamos vernos a las tres y media. (more formal) Verónica y yo quedamos en vernos a las tres y media. (more colloquial) (Verónica and I agreed to meet at half past three.) Acordarse de [algo] = to remember [something] When acordar is used with a reflexive pronoun, it means "to remember [something]. -Ayer estuve pensando en cómo nos conocimos. -Pues, yo no me acuerdo...-Yesterday, I was thinking about how we met. -Emm, I don't remember... Anoche no me acordé de decirte que Luisa te llamó dos veces.Last night I forgot to tell you that Luisa called twice. [lit: didn't remember to tell you...] Por suerte, se acordó de traer los documentos.Luckily, he remembered to bring the documents. Esta vez me he acordado de nuestro aniversario.This time I remembered our anniversary. If what the person remembers is explicit, the preposition "de" is required. Whatever is remembered can be expressed with a noun, an infinitive, or a subordinate clause (after de). Do not omit "de" in these cases. This would be incorrect: "Esta vez me he acordado nuestro aniversario."

Using El Futuro Perfecto to talk about the past (future perfect)

In Spanish, we use El Futuro Perfecto to make a supposition about something that happened in the past. For example: Se habrán acostado al llegar al hotel porque el viaje ha sido largo.They must have gone to bed upon arriving at the hotel because the trip was very long. Lo habré conocido antes porque su cara me suena.I must have met him before because his face is familiar. In English this supposition is generally expressed with "must have". In Spanish we don't need to add anything to the sentence to express that supposition/probability. The use of El Futuro Perfecto includes that nuance. The use of El Futuro Perfecto with this nuance will very often be triggered by a question or previous comment using El Pretérito Perfecto or El Presente for example: "Marisa está muy guapa hoy, ¿verdad?" (Marisa looks very pretty today, doesn't she?) Habrá ido a la peluquería esta mañana.She must have gone to the hairdresser's this morning. or "¿Dónde ha ido tu hermano?" (Where did your brother go?) Habrá ido a casa de su amigo Miguel. Siempre lo visita los sábados.He must have gone to his friend Miguel's. He always visits him on Saturdays.

Use the infinitive after prepositions (not gerund)

In the cases where, in English, a gerund (e.g dancing, eating, living) is used, in Spanish the infinitive is generally used instead (e.g bailar, comer, vivir), especially if the phrase in Spanish contains a preposition. Here are some examples: Estoy interesado en ofrecerte un trabajo. - I am interested in offering you a job. Después de cenar, veremos la televisión. - After having dinner, we will watch the television. Hice la traducción sin mirar el diccionario. - I did the translation without consulting in the dictionary. Ella está acostumbrada a dormir en un colchón duro. - She is used to sleeping on a hard mattress. Notice how in the Spanish sentence there is an infinitive after the preposition, while in English there is a gerund (with or without a preposition). Here are some more examples: Hice el examen sin mirar el reloj. - I did the exam without looking at the clock. Yo había parado de bailar cuando él se unió a la fiesta. - I had stopped dancing when he joined the party. Debo centrarme en mejorar mi español. - I must focus on improving my Spanish. In Spanish the only possible verbal form directly after a preposition is an infinitive.

Using cualquier/a to express any (indefinite adjectives)

In Spanish, we use cualquier or cualquiera to express any in the sense of "it doesn't matter which or what" (as in You can take any book). Now let's see how to use cualquier or cualquiera! Cualquier + [singular noun] = any + [singular noun] Coge cualquier libro. - Take any book. Lee cualquier página. - Read any page. Elige cualquier camiseta. - Choose any T-shirt. Cualquier is used before a singular noun, and never agrees in gender. Un/una [singular noun] + cualquiera = any + [singular noun] Coge un plato cualquiera. - Take any dish. Lee una revista cualquiera. - Read any magazine. Compra un pescado cualquiera. - Buy any fish. Cualquiera is also singular and invariable but it is used after a noun. And it always needs the indefinite article (un/una). ATTENTION: There is also a plural form of cualquiera: cualesquiera. - [plural noun] + cualesquiera = any + [plural noun]- cualesquiera + [plural noun] = any + [plural noun] Escoge cualesquiera métodos. - Choose any methods. Compra dos libros cualesquiera. - Buy any two books. Cualquier is the short form, and cualquiera is the full form. Just pick one of them and be careful with the placement. Cualquier/cualquiera versus algún/alguna and ningún/ninguna Compra alguna fruta.Buy some fruit. No compres ninguna fruta. - Don't buy any fruit. Compra cualquier fruta. - Buy any fruit. ¡No compres cualquier fruta! - Don't buy any old fruit! In Spanish, any (in the sense of some) is equivalent to: - algún/alguna/algunos/algunas in affirmative sentences.- ningún/ninguna/ningunos/ningunas in negative sentences.The meaning of cualquier(a) is closer to any whatsoever/any old, and can be used in both affirmative and negative sentences.

How to say I work/You work/What do you do? with the verb trabajar

In Spanish, we use the verb trabajar (to work) in El Presente to say: I work ..., You work... or What do you do? Have a look: Yo trabajo en una oficina.I work in an office. Yo trabajo como secretaria en una empresa.I work as a secretary in a company. Tú trabajas en un banco.You work in a bank. Usted trabaja de contable.You work as an accountant. (Formal you) You can omit the pronouns yo, tú, usted if you want: Yo trabajo en una oficina. = Trabajo en una oficina. Tú trabajas en un banco. = Trabajas en un banco. Usted trabaja de contable. = Trabaja de contable. If you want to make the sentences above questions, simply add the question marks and change the intonation: ¿Tú trabajas en un banco? - Do you work in a bank? ¿Usted trabaja de contable? - Do you work as an accountant? If you want to ask someone what he/she does for a living, you can ask this way: ¿En qué trabajas? - What do you do? (Lit: In what do you work?) ¿En qué trabaja? - What do you do? (Formal you) or you could use this slightly more formal question: ¿A qué te dedicas? - What do you do? ¿A qué se dedica? - What do you do? (Formal you) Remember: Trabajo... I work... Trabajas... / Trabaja... You work... ¿En qué trabajas / trabaja? What do you do? ¿A qué te dedicas / se dedica? What do you do? Also remember: Trabajo en [a place] = I work in... Trabajo de/como [profession] = I work as a ...

Using el de/la de/los de/las de to specify what/who you are talking about

In Spanish, when someone wants to clarify what/who he/she is referring to, you can use: Artículo definido + de Have a look and listen to the following examples: Mira esos cuadros. El de la derecha es espectacular. - Look at those paintings. The one on the right is spectacular. Todas son preciosas, pero la de flores amarillas me encanta. - All of them are beautiful, but I love the one with yellow flowers. Casi todos mis estudiantes son buenísimos, pero los de segundo curso son geniales. - Most of my students are very good, but the ones in year two are great. Notice how in the examples above: They can refer to things or people. The singular definite articles (el/la) are used to refer to one thing/person, and agree in gender. The plural definite articles (los/las) are used to refer to more than one thing/people and agree in gender. There is no need to add any preposition after "de". Todas son preciosas, pero la de flores amarillas me encanta. Todas son preciosas, pero la de con flores amarillas me encanta. (INCORRECT WITH CON, PREPOSITION NOT NEEDED) El de/la de/los de/las de can be followed by adjectives, articles + nouns, and adverbs. Me gusta la de rojo. (adjective) - I like the one in red. Voy a comprar el de la tienda pequeña. (article + noun) - I am going to buy the one in the small shop. Los de mañana serán más frescos. (adverb) - Tomorrow's (ones) will be fresher. Remember that if el de/la de/los de/las de are followed by masculine article "el", then de + el become "del". For example: ¿Qué restaurante prefieres? Yo prefiero el del hotel. - Which restaurant do you prefer? I prefer the one in the hotel.

Por culpa de/gracias a = because of/thanks to

In Spanish, when we want to say that something happens "because of" someone or something we can use the phrase "por culpa de". To express the opposite sentiment, i.e. that something happens "thanks to" something/someone we can use "gracias a". Let's see how they work: Por culpa de Por culpa de is followed by a common noun or a proper noun. No hemos podido salir en todo el día por culpa de la lluvia. - We haven't been able to go out all day because of the rain. Siempre se están peleando por culpa de su madre. Es una entrometida. - They are always fighting because of his mum. She is nosy. Por culpa de Miguel no hemos ganado el partido. - We didn't win the match because of Miguel. Gracias a Gracias a is followed by a common noun, a proper noun or a subordinate clause (generally using the indicative), El problema se resolvió gracias a la intervención del profesor. - The problem was solved thanks to the teacher's intervention. Gracias a la colaboración de los vecinos, las calles quedaron adornadas para la fiesta. - Thanks to the neighbours collaboration, the streets were decorated for the party. Finalmente, pudimos celebrar nuestra boda gracias a que nuestros padres nos ayudaron económicamente. - In the end, we could celebrate our wedding thanks to our parents helping financially. Gracias a que Gracias a que is constructed the same way as when you use "porque": Pudimos celebrar nuestra boda gracias a que nuestros padres nos ayudaron económicamente. Pudimos celebrar nuestra boda porque nuestros padres nos ayudaron económicamente. Note that gracias a que could also be translated as "because" as well as "thanks to". Generally, we use "por culpa de" for something with a "negative result" and "gracias a (que)" for something with a "positive result", but sometimes, when we talk "ironically" we can swap them. For example, we could say: Gracias a Miguel, hoy no hemos ganado el partido. - Thanks to Miguel, we didn't win the match today. (ironic - meaning it's his fault) Por culpa de mi novio soy la mujer más feliz del mundo. - It's my boyfriend's fault that I am the happiest woman in the world. (ironic - meaning thanks to him)

Repetition of direct object pronouns

In sentences where the direct object is represented by "a + pronoun", e.g "a mí, a ti, a ella..." it is necessary to repeat the direct object with another pronoun (me, te, lo, la, nos, os, los, las) in the same sentence. Have a look at the following examples: Lo he visto a él primero, y después a ella. - I saw him first, and then her. Las he invitado a ellas. - I invited them. María no vino a mi casa. Yo la visité a ella. - María didn't come to my house. I visited her. It would be incorrect to omit the direct objects me, te, lo/la, nos, os, los/las. However we could omit the direct objects introduced with "a + pronoun": "Lo he visto primero." "Las he invitado." "La visité." Sometimes the presence of both types of direct objects are necessary in order to be more precise or to clarify: If you are talking about two people, one female and one male, you would use the pronouns with "a" (mí, ti, él, ella, nosotros, vosotros, ellos) to avoid confusion, or to emphasise who receives the action of the verb. Notice how in English this is not necessary (only one pronoun is used). For example: No lo he llamado a él, la he llamado a ella. - I didn't call him, I called her. Ese chico me estaba mirando a mí, no a ti. - That boy was looking at me, not you.

Using Cómo/dónde/quién/qué + ir a + infinitive to state the obvious/impossible

Instead of indicating an action in the future, Ir a + infinitive can be used to express "obviousness" when it is used with cómo, dónde, quién or qué, generally in an interrogative or an exclamatory sentence. This construction is often used in colloquial Spanish when someone makes a comment and we reply to express that what was just said is evident, absurd or simply obvious. Let's see some examples: A person says: Espero que Marta no haya perdido el tren.I - hope Marta didn't miss her train. A reaction to this could be: ¿Cómo va a perder el tren, si ha llegado a la estación media hora antes? - How could she miss the train, when she arrived at the station half an hour early? A person says: Me pregunto dónde estará Antonio. - I wonder where Antonio could be. A reaction to this could be: ¿Dónde va a estar? Pues, en casa de su novia como siempre. - Where is he going to be? Obviously at his girlfriend's house as usual. A person says: ¿Qué te pasa? Pareces tan serio... - What's wrong? You look so serious... A reaction to this could be: ¡Qué iba a pasar! Nada, no pasa nada. - Why should there be anything wrong? [Lit: What is going to happen?] There is nothing wrong at all. A person says: Nadie sabía lo del embarazo de Belén. - Nobody knew about Belén's pregnancy. A reaction to this could be: ¡Quién lo iba a saber con lo bien que lo ha disimulado! - Who could have known when she hid it so well! Using ir in either El Presente or El Pretérito Imperfecto (va a ..., iba a ...) is not related to whether the idea is something to do with the present, the past or the future. These structures are also sometimes used in a negative construction. For example, if someone makes this statement: El colegio está apoyando mucho a los estudiantes con dificultades de aprendizaje. - The school is fully supporting students with learning difficulties. Someone may react by indicating that they are stating the obvious and say: ¡Cómo no iba a apoyarlos! Es su obligación. Of course they support them! It's their duty.

Que vs Qué vs Lo que

It helps to translate "lo que" as "what" (as in an object or idea) "Te dijo lo que estaba pensando" - He told you what he was thinking, the "What" being "whatever it was". - If you said "te dijo que estaba pensando" it would mean "he told you that he was thinking" - So therefore translate "que" (when used in the middle of a sentence, like so) as "that". Examples: "Yo sé que tu quieres ir al banco" - I know that you want to go to the bank "Yo sé lo que quieres hacer" - I know what you want to do. "Me dices que estás pensando" - You tell me that you are thinking. "Me dices lo que estás pensando" - You tell me what you are thinking. PS "qué" with an accent on the "e" is only used when it is a question word. (¿Qué haces?, ¿Qué estás pensando?, etc).

Forming passive sentences with "se"

La pasiva refleja This structure is possible with transitive verbs, i.e verbs that have a direct object. The invariable se is placed in front of the verb. If the direct object is a singular noun (apartamento), the verb is conjugated in the 3rd person singular (vende) If the direct object is plural, (apartamentos) the verb is conjugated in the 3rd person plural (venden). Se vende apartamento de lujo en la playa. - A luxurious apartment is for sale at the beach. Se venden apartamentos de lujo en la playa. - Luxurious apartments are for sale at the beach.

Preposition 'de' + Pronoun

Las chicas están hablando de mí. - The girls are talking about me. Gracias, hemos aprendido mucho de ti. - Thank you, we've learnt a lot from you. Es un honor, viniendo de usted. - It is an honour, coming from you [formal].

Using le and les = [to] it, him, her, them (indirect object pronouns)

Le and les are pronouns: they replace a noun (person, animal or thing) used as the indirect object in the sentence (object introduced by the preposition a). Have a look at these examples: ¿Ella envía un regalo a Miguel? Sí, ella le envía un regalo.Is she sending a present to Miguel? - Yes, she is sending him a present. ¿Quién prepara la fiesta a Sofía? Nosotros le preparamos la fiesta. - Who is preparing the party for Sofía? We are preparing the party for her. ¿Luna escribe a sus amigas? Sí, les escribe. - Does Luna write to her friends? Yes, she writes to them. You also use le or les to replace the formal forms usted and ustedes: Señora Valls, le doy su carta. - Mrs. Valls, I am giving you your letter. Señor y Señora Aldama, hoy les pago la renta. - Mr. and Mrs. Aldama, today I'm paying you the rent. Note that the indirect object pronoun agrees in number with the noun it is replacing: Masculine / Feminine Singular: le = to it him / her / you Plural: les = to them / you The indirect object pronoun is placed in front of the conjugated verb. ATTENTION: In Spanish, it's common to use both the indirect object pronoun and the indirect object noun it's replacing in the same sentence, for emphasis: Ella le envió un regalo a Miguel. - She sent a present to Miguel. Nosotros les preparamos la cena a nuestros invitados.We are cooking dinner for our guests. Señor López, le entrego el paquete.Mr. Lopez, I am delivering the package to you. Hoy les pago la renta a ustedes.Today I'm paying you the rent. Here are some other examples where "le/les" refer to things: Añadí sal a la comida. - I added salt to the food. Le añadí sal. - I added salt to it Puse alcohol a las bebidas. - I put some alcohol in the drinks. Les puse alcohol. - I put some alcohol in them.

Ningún, ninguna + noun + verb = No [noun] + verb (negation)

Let's see how you can place the adjective ningún (a, os, as) at the beginning of a sentence. For example: Ningún barco fue tan grande como el Titanic.No ship was as big as the Titanic. Ninguna chica viajará contigo a ninguna parte.No girl will travel with you anywhere. In the examples above, we don't use no when placing ningún or any of its forms at the beginning of the sentence. Here are some more examples: Ningún pintor del siglo XX pintaba como Picasso.No artist from the twentieth century painted like (as well as) Picasso. Ninguna película tiene subtítulos en este cine.No film has subtitles in this cinema. You can only use the singular forms ningún and ninguna at the beginning of a sentence if you are not using the double negative "no...ningún/ninguna". You cannot use the plurals ningunos and ningunas unless the noun it refers to is always used in its plural form: ¡Ningunas gafas me quedan bien!No glasses suit me!

Order of indirect and direct pronouns in the same clause

No matter how many different pronouns are used in the sentence, the indirect one comes first and the direct one comes after. e.g Dáselo a ella. - Give it to her. Se la dimos. - We gave it to them. María está comprándoselos. - María is buying them for him. No sabemos por qué se los ofrecieron. - We don't know why they offered them to them.

Using por (not para) to express the originating cause or reason

The preposition por (and not para) is used in Spanish in sentences where we want to give a reason why something happens. Have a look and listen to these examples: Me casé por amor. - I married for love. No me divorcié por los niños. - I didn't get divorced because of the children. In both cases above the preposition por is followed by a noun, but you can also see por followed by an infinitive for example: Le dieron el trabajo por ser el primo del director. - He was given the job because he was the manager's cousin. Va a estudiar medicina por seguir la tradición familiar. - She is studying medicine because it's family tradition.

Using lo de que + conjugated verb / lo de + noun / infinitive / adverb to refer to something already mentioned

Lo de que + [conjugated verb] In Spanish, when something has been mentioned in a conversation, we refer to it afterwards with: Lo de que + [sentence with a conjugated verb] For example: Imagine that someone said yesterday "María is going to live abroad", we would refer to this later like this: Lo de que María se va a vivir a Francia, ¿es verdad? - That thing about María going to live in France, is it true? If someone has mentioned "getting a new job", we could refer to this later on: Lo de que tengas un trabajo nuevo me parece genial. - That thing about you getting a new job is great. "Lo de que" can be followed by the indicative or subjunctive, without changing the meaning of the sentence. For example: Lo de que yo pago todo era una broma. (present indicative) Lo de que yo pague todo era una broma. (present subjunctive) - That thing about me paying for everything was a joke. Lo de + infinitive/noun/adverb We can refer to a previous comment/fact in the same way with: Lo de + Infinitivo Lo de + [noun] Lo de + [adverb] (with infinitive) Lo de irse a Francia, ¿es verdad? - That thing about going to France, is it true? (with proper noun)Lo de María, ¿es verdad? - That thing about María, is it true? (with noun)Lo de su decisión, ¿es verdad? - That thing about her decision, is it true? (with adverb)Lo de ayer, ¿es verdad? - What was said yesterday, is it true?

Using preposition [except a and de] + el que, la que, los que, las que = with/for/on which (relative pronouns)

Look at these Spanish examples: El vestido con el que fui al baile era rojo. - The dress which I went to the ball with was red. La universidad para la que trabajé es bastante famosa. - The university which I worked for is quite famous. Los hoteles en los que te alojaste eran de cinco estrellas. - The hotels which you stayed in had five stars. Las zapatillas con las que ella hizo deporte no eran muy cómodas. -The trainers which she exercised in were not very comfortable. The relative pronouns el que, la que, los que and las que must agree with the word that precedes them. They can be used to refer to both people and things. El hombre para el que reservé el hotel estaba muy contento. - The man who I booked the hotel for was very happy. Los estudiantes con los que salí de fiesta eran muy simpáticos.The students who I partied with were very nice. Note that if you refer to people, you can also use the relative pronoun quien/quienes: La chica con la que salía antes era francesa.The girl who I used to date was French. La chica con quien salía antes era francesa.The girl who I used to date was French. Los abogados con los que hablé parecían muy profesionales.The solicitors I spoke with seemed very professional. Los abogados con quienes hablé parecían muy profesionales.The solicitors I spoke with seemed very professional.

Using the subjunctive with impersonal expressions

Look at these examples of impersonal statements using the Modo subjuntivo: Es necesario que Jaime estudie más. - It is necessary for Jaime to study more. Es genial que podamos aparcar aquí. - It is great that we can park here. Es imprescindible que hayamos entendido esta lección. - It is essential that we have understood this lesson. Es aconsejable que dejemos de fumar para que nuestra salud mejore. - It is advisable that we give up smoking so that our health improves. Exceptions: impersonal statements using the Modo indicativo Most impersonal expressions that use the formula ser + adjective + que use the Modo subjuntivo as long as they do not express: a truth (or something that is presented as a truth with a phrase like es verdad que) a certainty (like es cierto que) a fact (like es un hecho que) Phrases beginning with these expressions instead use the Modo indicativo. Take a look at these examples: Es verdad que los hombres son de Marte y las mujeres de Venus. - It is true that men are from Mars and women are from Venus. Es verdad que tuvieron mucho éxito en la campaña electoral. - It is true that they were very successful in the election campaign. Es cierto que Einstein desarrolló la teoría de la relatividad. - It is certain that Einstein developed the theory of relativity. Es cierto que irán al concierto de Julio Iglesias la semana que viene. - It is certain that they will go to Julio Iglesias's concert next week. Es un hecho que no volaríamos al aeropuerto de Los Ángeles. - It is a fact that we wouldn't fly to Los Angeles airport. Es un hecho que hay mucha pobreza e injusticia en el mundo. - It is a fact that there is a lot of poverty and injustice in the world. Negative forms use the Modo subjuntivo However, phrases beginning with the negative forms of the above phrases (noes verdad que, etc.) also use the Modo subjuntivo. For example: No es cierto que mi hermano venga a la fiesta. - It is not true that my brother is coming to the party. No es un hecho que hayan aprobado los examenes. - It is not a fact that they have passed the exams. No es verdad que mis amigos beban demasiado los sábados. - It is not true that my friends drink too much on Saturdays.

Using Cuánto + verb in exclamations about quantities

Look at these sentences with the exclamatory word ¡cuánto + verb! ¡Cuánto aprendo en alemán! - I'm learning so much in German! [lit: How much I learn in German!] ¡Cuánto has crecido desde la última vez que te vi! - How much you've grown since the last time I saw you! ¡Cuánto vas a viajar con tu nuevo trabajo! - You're going to travel so much with your new job! [lit: How much you are going to travel with your new job!] ¡Cuánto me estoy acordando de ti!I'm remembering so much about you! [lit: How much I am remembering you!] Cuánto can be used in front of a verb to express surprise at how much someone is doing that action. In this specific use of cuánto, the other forms are not correct (cuánta, cuántos, cuántas). It would be incorrect to say: ¡Cuántos sabes, papá! or ¡Cuánta bailas!

Gender and plural of nouns ending in -ma (greek origin)

Many nouns ending in -ma (from Greek origin) are masculine in Spanish.Have a look and listen to these examples: El teorema de Pitágoras es fácil de entender.Pythagoras' theorem is easy to understand. El sistema del ordenador no funcionaba.The computer system didn't work. Tengo un dilema bastante complicado.I have a quite complicated dilemma. El idioma mandarín se habla en China.The Mandarin language is spoken in China. Remember that articles and adjectives must agree with these masculine nouns. If you know the direct translation in English you can confirm if nouns have a "Greek origin" by checking if they have a cognate adjective ending in "-matic" (-mático/a in Spanish). For example: drama = dramático/a problema = problemático/a idioma = idiomático/a Forming the plural To form the plural of these masculine nouns simply add an -s. Have a look and listen to these examples: Mis programas favoritos son las comedias.My favourite programmes are comedies. Miguel tenía muchos problemas en el trabajo.Miguel had many problems at work. Ellos van a estudiar todos los temas para el examen.They are going to study all the subjects for the exam. Los aromas de lavanda son buenos para relajarse.Lavender aromas are good for relaxing.

How to use Gustar to say you like something?

Me gusta (I like) + [singular noun] Te gusta (You like) + [singular noun] Me gustan (I like) + [plural noun] Te gustan (You like) + [plural noun] e.g Me gusta Barcelona - I like Barcelona No me gustan las verduras. - I do not like vegetables e.g Te gustan las manzanas - You like apples No te gusta la profesora de historia. - You do not like the History teacher

When is passive voice (passive sentence structures) used?

The passive voice is used to talk about a person or object without making mention of whoever or whatever is performing the action on that person or object.

Using preposition "a" to indicate how/in which style something is done

The preposition a is often used in phrases in Spanish to indicate how something is done, or in which style. Means/tools: The preposition is followed by a singular noun. For example: Fuimos a su pueblo a caballo. - We went to his village on horseback. Tendrás que ir a pie porque hoy no hay autobuses. - You will have to go on foot as there are no buses today. Los chicos cruzaron el río a nado en pleno invierno. - The boys swam across the river in midwinter. El mantón está bordado a mano. Es precioso. - The shawl is hand embroidered. It is beautiful. Note that not all means of transport use the preposition a (en avión, en tren..) Denoting abruptness: Used generally with a plural noun. For example: Lo echó del restaurante a patadas. - He kicked him out of the restaurant. La multitud consiguió salir de allí a empujones. - The crowd managed to get out by pushing and shoving. Expressing how an action is carried out or how it unfolds, sometimes expressing intensity. Used generally with a plural noun. For example: Íbamos caminando a ciegas porque perdimos las linternas. - We were walking blindly because we lost our torches. Se bebió la botella de whisky a tragos. Estaba muy borracho. - He gulped down the bottle of whisky. He was very drunk. El agua caía a raudales y se inundó el lugar. - The water was pouring down and the place was flooded. Using a + lo / la + adjective/noun: This is generally referring to something that is generally established as a specific way of doing something, imitating a certain way/style. It is often seen with nationality adjectives, and it is very common when talking about cooking styles. For example: Hoy vamos a hacer una cena rápida, cocinaré unas tortillas a la francesa y una ensalada. - Today we are having a quick dinner, I'll cook some simple omelettes (French-style omelettes [not Spanish tortillas]) and a salad. El pulpo a la gallega es sin duda mi plato español preferido. - Galician-style octopus is undoubtedly my favourite Spanish dish. Mis padres celebraron sus bodas de plata a lo grande. Invitaron a 300 personas. - My parents celebrated their silver wedding anniversary in style. They invited 300 people. Subió al escenario y se puso a cantar a lo Elvis Presley. Lo hizo fenomenal. - He went onstage and started to sing like Elvis Presley. He nailed it. Note that when we say that something is done in a certain style the way a specific celebrity does/did, it is always "a lo" (not a la) even if the celebrity is female. For example: Esa chica lleva un peinado de los 50, a lo (a la) Marilyn Monroe. - That girl has a '50s hairdo, like Marilyn Monroe.

Using me, te, le, nos, os, les (indirect object pronouns)

Me, te, le, nos, os, les are indirect object pronouns in Spanish. They are used to indicate who benefits from or is affected by the action of the verb in the sentence. The most common translations in English are: (to/for) me, you, him, her, us, them. As pronouns they replace people, animals or objects. Have a look at the following examples: Sergio me compró un reloj muy bonito. - Sergio bought me a very pretty watch. (for me) ¿Te dio tu madre el dinero? - Did your mum give you the money? (to you) El hombre le indicó el camino en el mapa. - The man showed him/her the way on the map. (to him/her) Ellos nos regalaron unas camisetas en el evento. - They gave us some t-shirts at the event. (to us) Os puse unas monedas en la mesa para pagar el autobús. - I put some coins on the table for you to pay for the bus. Les escribimos una carta muy larga y emotiva. - We wrote them a very long and emotional letter. Claudia siempre le añade mucha sal a la comida - Claudia always adds a lot of salt to food. Sometimes, when we talk about putting or attaching things on people, animals or things we still use the indirect object pronouns without the preposition. For example: ¡Ven Canela! Te voy a poner la correa. - Come Canela! I am going to put the lead (US: leash) on you. Mi madre me puso el gorro. - My mum put my hat on me. Notice how in all the sentences above the pronouns are placed before the conjugated verb. Warning: Not all prepositions introduce an indirect object! Indirect objects are specifically the ones that the verb is doing something to or for.

Que: relative pronoun

Means who, or that/which Que refers to both things and people, and it is an invariable word, i.e it doesn't have to agree in gender or number to what it refers to. e.g Me encanta esa casa, que está en venta, por cierto. - I love that house, which is on sale, by the way.

Mientras with past tenses in the indicative and subjunctive (subordinate time/conditional clauses)

Mientras is used in time clauses that relate to past events as well as present events. For present events see Mientras with El Presente de Indicativo or El Presente de Subjuntivo. We use past tenses in the indicative with mientras when we want to express that two actions happened simultaneously. For example: Mientras tú veías la tele yo fregaba los platos. - While you watched the TV I washed the dishes. Los niños jugaron en el parque mientras los adultos nos tomábamos un café y charlábamos. - The children played at the park while we adults had a coffee and chatted. Mientras ella reñía a su hija, nosotras mirábamos hacia otro lado. - While she reprimanded her daughter, we looked the other way. Su romance fue bonito mientras duró. - Their romance was nice while it lasted. However, mientras can also be used with past tenses in the subjunctive, but the meaning will change. It no longer means "while" but "as long as/provided". They become subordinate clauses expressing a condition. In this case you can use both mientras and mientras que. Have a look: De pequeña, mi madre me dejaba ver la tele mientras que yo hiciera los deberes antes. - When I was little, my mother would let me watch TV as long as I did my homework first. Yo te habría aceptado de nuevo en casa mientras me hubieras contado la verdad. - I would have accepted your return home provided you had told me the truth. These sentences are talking about the past, with a condition, introduced by mientras/mientras que, for the main clause to be fulfilled. Bear in mind that we could also use mientras/mientras que with a past tense in the subjunctive when referring to a future/hypothetical situation. In this case we normally find the conditional in the main clause, which gives that sense of future/hypothetical idea. For example: Yo te habría aceptado de nuevo en casa mientras me hubieras contado la verdad. - I would have accepted your return home provided you had told me the truth. Mientras + past tenses in the indicative = while Mientras/mientras que + past tenses in the subjunctive = as long as

Using modal verbs in the passive voice

Modal verbs can be combined with the passive voice in Spanish, the same way as in English, e.g "He should be put in prison" or "I had to be taken to hospital." The modal verb is conjugated in the required tense and then followed by "ser" + participle (agreeing with the subject). For example: Deber (must/should) Ella debe ser trasladada a otro hospital. - She must be transferred to another hospital. Este candidato debería ser considerado para el nuevo puesto de director. - This candidate should be considered for the new post of director. Tener que (to have to) Lidia tuvo que ser atendida por el director del hotel.Lidia had to be taken care of by the hotel director. Ellas han tenido que ser acompañadas a casa porque era muy tarde.They had to be accompanied home because it was very late. Querer (to want) La cantante no quiso ser fotografiada por los periodistas después del concierto.The singer didn't want/refused to be photographed by the journalists after the concert. El ganador no ha querido ser identificado en público.The winner didn't want to be identified publicly. Poder (to be able to) Las joyas perdidas no pudieron ser localizadas.The lost jewels couldn't be found. Los sacos de harina podrán ser distribuídos por las aldeas pobres.The sacks of flour can be distributed around the poor hamlets. [lit: will be able to be distributed] Necesitar (to need) El producto necesita ser codificado.The product needs to be coded. Las flores necesitarán ser enviadas pronto.The flowers will need to be sent soon. Remember: Modal verb (conjugated) + ser + past participle (agreeing with subject) Note that the passive voice is not as commonly used in Spanish as it is in English. Sometimes, to avoid the formal passive in Spanish, we find alternatives in the active voice or using the passive "se" construction. For example for: Las joyas perdidas no pudieron ser localizadas. we could also say: No se pudieron localizar las joyas.orNadie pudo localizar las joyas. without changing the original meaning of the sentence.

Forming the singular of masculine and feminine adjectives ending in -z and -l

Most Spanish adjectives that end in -z and -l remain unchanged for the feminine singular.Have a look and listen to these examples: Antonio es un marido fiel.Antonio is a faithful husband. Cristina es una esposa fiel.Cristina is a faithful wife. Mi hijo es feliz.My son is happy. Mi hija es feliz.My daughter is happy. Notice how the form doesn't change when refering to a masculine noun or a feminine noun. Be careful! There are two exceptions to this rule which are: The adjective "andaluz" (Andalusian)El chico andaluz. (The Andalusian boy)La chica andaluza. (The Andalusian girl ) The adjective "español" ( Spanish)El chico español. (The Spanish boy)La chica española. (The Spanish girl)

Forming the singular and plural of adjectives ending in -án, ón, -or

Most Spanish adjectives that end in -ón, -án, or -or form their singular feminine by adding -a, and losing their written accent [´] Un hombre simplón (A foolish man) Una mujer simplona (A foolish woman) Un hombre holgazán (A lazy man) Una mujer holgazana (A lazy woman) To form their plurals they follow this rule: For masculine plural add -es to the singular masculine form.For feminine plural add -s to the singular feminine form. See how it changes from singular to plural: Un hombre simplón (A foolish man)Unos hombres simplones (some foolish men)Una mujer simplona (A foolish woman) Unas mujeres simplonas (some foolish women) Un hombre holgazán (A lazy man)Unos hombres holgazanes (Some lazy men)Una mujer holgazana (A lazy woman) Unas mujeres holgazanas (Some lazy women) Notice how the plurals do not have an accent [´] Un hombre trabajador (A hardworking man)Unos hombres trabajadores (Some hardworking men)Una mujer trabajadora (A hardworking woman) Unas mujeres trabajadoras (Some hardworking women) This particular group of adjectives ending in -or, that apply this rule, are those that derive from a verb (e.g trabajador derives from verb trabajar). There are other adjectives ending in -r that follow a different rule. See also Forming comparative adjectives mayor/menor/mejor/peor. Here are more examples: ¡Qué cabezón eres, Pedro! Tus hermanas no son tan cabezonas.How stubborn you can be, Pedro! Your sisters are not so stubborn. Ramiro es haragán, aunque sus primos son más haraganes.Ramiro is lazy, although his cousins are more lazy. Matías es trabajador pero vosotros no sois trabajadores.Matías is hardworking but you are not hardworking. Cristina es muy simplona y sus hermanas también son simplonas.Cristina is very foolish and her sisters are also foolish. Carmina es una chica trabajadora. Sus compañeras no son tan trabajadoras.Carmina is a hardworking girl. Her female colleagues are not so hardworking. An exception to this rule is adjective marrón (brown) which only has two forms: Singular masculine and feminine: marrón He comprado un bolso marrón. (I have bought a brown handbag.) He comprado una camisa marrón . (I have bought a brown shirt.) Plural masculine and feminine: marrones He comprado unos bolsos marrones. (I have bought some brown handbags.) He comprado unas camisas marrones . (I have bought some brown shirts.)

Bueno, malo, grande become buen, mal, gran before a noun (apócope)

Most adjectives usually come after a noun but the singular masculine adjectives bueno (good) and malo (bad) have special short forms - buen and mal - which can be used before the noun. Buen and mal can be used in front of masculine singular nouns, but they keep their longer forms "buena" and "mala" when used with feminine singular nouns. They have a slightly stronger meaning when used like this: Mi padre es un hombre bueno. - My dad is a good man. Mi padre es un buen hombre. - My dad is a good man. He tenido un día malo. - I have had a bad day. He tenido un mal día. - I have had a bad day. Similarly, grande (big), has a short-form gran which can also be used before the noun. Unlike buen and mal, gran can also be used with feminine nouns. Gran has a more figurative meaning of great or fantastic when used like this. Nueva York es una ciudad grande. - New York is a big city. Nueva York es una gran ciudad. - New York is a great/fantastic city. Silvia tiene un gran corazón. - Silvia has a big/generous heart. Note: The general term for short forms like these is "apócope". NB: The plural forms stay the same even if used before the noun. For example: Tengo buenos recuerdos de mi infancia. - I have good memories of my childhood. Lucía y Raquel son chicas buenas. - Lucía and Raquel are good girls. En Oxford y Salamanca hay muy buenas universidades. - Oxford and Salamanca have very good universities.

Nouns ending in -or are masculine

Most nouns that end in -or are masculine. Have a look at the following examples: Dicen que el amor lo puede todo.They say that love conquers all. El trabajador no ha venido a la fábrica hoy.The worker didn't come to the factory today. El paciente tenía mucho dolor en su espalda.The patient had a lot of pain in his back. To form the plural of these nouns simply add an -es: No me gustan los colores del cuadro.I don't like the colours in the painting. Los diseñadores van a presentar a sus modelos.The designers are going to introduce their models. Flor (flower) and labor (work) are some exceptions to this rule as they are feminine! Remember that the articles and adjectives accompanying these nouns must agree in gender and number.

Can you use El presente indicativo after the verb esperar que?

NO - It is grammatically wrong to use El Presente after the verb esperar que!

Using nada/nada de to say not at all

Nada de can be used with nouns, infinitives or clauses to express the idea of "any of it". Let's see some examples. Nada de + nouns No tengo nada de sueño, así que voy a seguir leyendo.I am not sleepy at all, so I'm going to keep reading. [lit: I have no sleepiness] No me das nada de miedo.I am not afraid of you at all. [lit: you don't give me any fear at all] ¡Te di 100 euros y dices que no tienes nada de dinero!I gave you 100 euros and you're saying you have no money at all! Nada de + infinitive Puedes invitar a tus amigos pero nada de beber alcohol.You can invite your friends over but absolutely no drinking alcohol. [alt: no drinking alcohol at all] ¡Nada de gritar!Absolutely no shouting! [alt: no shouting at all!] Nada + adjectives/adverbs Ese chico no baila nada mal. Mira, se mueve con mucho ritmo.That guy can dance really well. Look, he moves with a lot of rhythm. [lit: doesn't dance badly at all] No has llegado nada temprano. Son ya las 12.You haven't come early at all. It's already 12 o'clock. Las instrucciones no son nada complicadas.The instructions are not at all complicated. Notice how in these last examples above there is no "de". Bear in mind, though, that when this is used with the verb tener or haber, then you can add "de". For example: Esa historia no tiene nada de particular. Es algo que pasa comúnmente.That story is not at all special. It's something that happens all the time. No había nada de irónico en mis comentarios.There was no irony intended at all in my comments.

Gender of nouns ending in -umbre, -ión, -dad, -tad, -tis and -sis and their plural

Necesito saber la verdad.I need to know the truth. La relación con mi madre es difícil.The relationship with my mother is difficult. La gente no tiene mucha libertad en ese país.People don't have much freedom in that country. La educación en este colegio es excelente.The education in this school is outstanding. Nuestros amigos están entre la muchedumbre.Our friends are among the crowd. Estados Unidos pasó por una crisis económica en los años 20.The U.S.A went through an economic crisis in the twenties. El médico dice que tengo una otitis grave.The doctor says that I have acute otitis. Remember that articles and adjectives must agree with these feminine nouns. There are some exceptions to this rule, for example: el avión (the plane) not la avión el camión (the lorry) not la camión el análisis (the analysis) not la análisis el guion (the script) not la guion Forming the plural To form the plural of these feminine nouns simply add -es, except for nouns ending in -tis or -sis which keep the same form in singular and plural. Have a look and listen to these examples: Mis dos canciones preferidas son del mismo grupo.My two favourite songs are by the same band. Algunas ciudades españolas son bastante modernas.Some Spanish cities are quite modern. Now look at this example for words ending -tis or -sis: Javier ha hecho una tesis sobre un tema difícil de biología.Javier has written a dissertation about a difficult topic in biology. Algunos alumnos han presentado sus tesis esta mañana.Some students gave a presentation on their dissertations this morning.

Using desde (hace) with El Presente instead of El Pretérito Perfecto to express since/for

No fumo desde hace un año. - I have not smoked for a year. Desde hace dos meses María está muy contenta.María has been very happy for 2 months. No veo a Ana desde hace tres semanas.I have not seen Ana for three weeks. Desde hace 24 horas no duermo.I haven't slept for 24 hours. To express that you have done something for + [duration] - i.e. to talk about an action or event that started in the past but is still ongoing in the present - in Spanish you use El Presente with desde hace + [duration] as such: - Desde hace + [duration] + action in El Presenteor- Action in El Presente + desde hace + [duration] You can never use El Pretérito Perfecto (like Present Perfect in English) with desde hace:No he fumado fumo desde hace un año. Desde + [specific date] = since + [specific date] In the same context, you will use desde instead of desde hace when your action's starting point is a specific date: Vende coches desde 1987.He has been selling cars since 1987. Vivo en Madrid desde septiembre.I have lived in Madrid since September. Desde las ocho no come.He has not eaten since eight o'clock. Desde el lunes voy al gimnasio.I've been going to the gym since Monday. Note that if you want to ask someone "since when they´ve done something" the question is: ¿Desde cuándo + present tense? Since when have you/have you not... ? For example: - ¿Desde cuándo fumas? -Desde hace dos años.- Since when have you smoked? - Since two years ago. - ¿Desde cuándo no ves a tu padre? - Desde pequeño.- Since when have you not seen your father? - Since I was little.

Gender of nouns ending in -ista and -crata

Nouns ending wtih -ista and -crata usually refer to people and can be either masculine or feminine, depending on who you are referring to. Read and listen to these examples with the noun dentista: El dentista me hizo un empaste ayer.The (male) dentist gave me a filling yesterday. La dentista dice que me lave los dientes todos los días.The (female) dentist told me to brush my teeth every day. Los dentistas se reunieron en el colegio médico.The (all male or mixture of male and female) dentists met at the medical college. Las dentistas ayudan a los niños siempre.The (female) dentists always help the children. As you can see above, both masculine and feminine singular forms are identical. You only need to change the article to specify if it is male or female. To make the plural for either gender, simply add an -s. El oculista. Los oculistasThe optician. The opticians La feminista. Las feministasThe feminist. The feminists Nouns ending in -ista Here you can see other nouns ending in -ista following the same rule as dentista, referring to jobs or someone supporting an idea or ideology: periodista (journalist) futbolista (football player) artista (artist) colonialista (colonialist) centrista (centrist) izquierdista (politically left-wing) derechista (politically right-wing) Nouns ending in -crata Nouns ending in -crata denote someone "in favour of a government or an ideas system" and follow the same rule as the -ista nouns: Un autócrata muy conocido fue el zar de Rusia.A well-known (male) autocrat was the Tsar of Russia. La burócrata vive bien de su sueldo.The (female) bureaucrat lives well from her salary. Los aristócratas poseen muchas propiedades en el extranjero.The (all male or mixture of male and female) aristocrats possess many properties abroad. Las demócratas respetan las opiniones ajenas.The (female) democrats respect other people's opinions.

Using es bueno/malo or está bien/mal

One of the most common difficulties for Spanish learners is how to differenciate between: es bueno/malo and está bien/mal. Es bueno it is good Es bueno que estudies todas las tardes.It is good that you study every afternoon. Comes demasiado y eso no es bueno.You eat too much and that is not good. Está bien it is good Está bien que estudies todas las tardes.It is good that you study every afternoon. Comes demasiado y eso no está bien.You eat too much and that is not good. As you can see, both are translated in the same way. But remember not to mix them up: Es + bueno [adjective]Está + bien [adverb] Have a look: Está bueno que seas paciente con tus hermanos.Es bueno que seas paciente con tus hermanos.It is good that you are patient with your siblings. Es bien que practiques español para tu exámen.Está bien que practiques español para tu exámen.It is good that you practise Spanish for your exam. The same goes for es malo and está mal. Es malo it is bad Es malo que tomemos tanto alcohol.It is bad that we drink so much alcohol. Fumar es malo.Smoking is bad. Está mal it is bad/wrong Está mal que tomemos tanto alcohol.It's bad/wrong that we drink so much alcohol. Fumar está mal.Smoking is bad/wrong. Es + malo [adjective]Está + mal [adverb] Bear in mind that although they are very often interchangeable (está bien = es bueno / está mal = es malo), when we use está bien/mal we are adding a nuance of being "morally" good or bad. For example: Está mal arrojar basura al mar.It is (morally) wrong to throw rubbish in the sea. If we are talking about a film, a play, a book..., using está bien will imply that, more than being good quality, it is entertaining/amusing/interesting: Tienes que ir a ver esa película; está muy bien. You have to go and see that film; it is very good/entertaining. ¿Está bien el libro que estás leyendo?Is the book you are reading good/interesting? We don't tend to use está mal as much in this last context to express that something is not entertaining/interesting/amusing; we tend to say "no está bien" instead. You will never find es followed by bien/mal. However, está can be followed by bueno/malo, but the meaning will be different. For example: El arroz con leche de mi abuela está bueno.My grandma's rice pudding is tasty. Este niño está malo.This boy is ill.

Using ser (not estar) + de to indicate ownership

One of the uses of ser (not estar) is to express ownership, who something belongs to. Have a look and listen to these examples: Estas medallas eran de mi abuelo. - These medals were my grandfather's. No es tu problema. Es el problema de Andrés. - It is not your problem. It is Andrés's problem. La mansión será de nuestros hijos en el futuro. - The mansion will be our children's in the future. [Something] + ser (conjugated) + de + [someone]

Using por (not para) to express approximate location

One of the uses of the preposition por (not para) in Spanish is to express an approximate location. Have a look at this example: He viajado por el noroeste de España este verano.I travelled across the northwest of Spain this summer. The speaker is not specific about where exactly he has been in the Northwest. We understand that he has been "over there". Here are some more examples expressing approximate location: ¿Dónde está el pub irlandés? -Creo que está por el centro.¿Where is the Irish pub? -I think is (somewhere) in the town centre. ¿Has visto mis gafas? - Sí, las he visto por el salón.Did you see my glasses? -Yes, I saw them (somewhere) in the lounge. The way the preposition por is used in this context is very similar to the way we use the preposition en to say "in/on" a place, although when using por there is a stronger nuance of meaning "approximate place" or "around somewhere". Have a look at these examples where por and en are pretty much interchangable: Hay muchos monumentos por la ciudad.There are lots of monuments around the city. Hay muchos monumentos en la ciudad.There are lots of monuments in the city.

Using que at the beginning of a question to express disbelief (without a written accent)

One way to express disbelief about something that is happening, has happened or will happen in Spanish is by forming a question introduced by "que". It is important to note that this "que" does not have an accent despite being a question. Have a look and listen to the following examples: ¿Que te vas a casar con Javier? No lo puedo creer. - Are you really marrying Javier? I can't believe it. ¿Que escalásteis el Kilimanjaro? Increible. - I can't believe you climbed Kilimanjaro! Incredible! ¿Que tu hija va a salir en la tele? - Your daughter is going to be on TV? Que without an accent In this case "que" is a conjunction, although in this specific usage it is as though part of the sentence is omitted. Let's look at the following example to understand how the word "que" works in this sort of sentence to express surprise and disbelief about something you have been told or have heard generally: ¿Que te ha tocado la lotería? - You've really won the lottery? We could easily have said the same in a exclamatory sentence: - ¡No puedo creer que te haya tocado la lotería!I can't believe that you won the lottery! or ¡Me han dicho que te ha tocado la lotería!I've been told that you won the lottery! But with the shortened "que" version, the initial phrase that expresses surprise/disbelief is omitted. Important note about using the subjunctive: Bear in mind that this structure does not admit the subjunctive if the initial sentence is in the indicative. For example, if you imagine that someone says: "Tengo mucho frío", you could reply: "¿Que tienes mucho frío?" but not "¿Que tengas mucho frío?" However, look at this example where the initial sentence is in the subjunctive already to express disbelief: "Me pidió que le diera dinero." (subjunctive) then the reply would be: "¿Que le dieras dinero?" (subjunctive)

Using Soy de [city/country] to say where you are from

To say where you are from in Spanish, you use (Yo) soy de + [city/country/region]. Read and listen to these examples: Yo soy de Barcelona. - I am from Barcelona. Soy de Argentina. - I am from Argentina. To ask where are you from? you can use either the informal tú form (eres), or the formal usted form (es). ¿De dónde eres? - Where are you from? [informal] ¿De dónde es usted? - Where are you from? [formal] In Spanish, you can omit the pronoun yo (I) and use the verb on its own, e.g. Soy de Madrid. GRAMMAR: Yo soy is the first person singular of the verb ser in El Presente = I am.

Using demasiado, bastante, suficiente, poco, tanto and mucho to express quantity (quantitative adjectives)

Poco (little), mucho (much), demasiado (too much), bastante (enough), and suficiente (enough/sufficient) all express an undefined quantity. Note that in Spanish these adjectives agree with the noun they modify. Poco, poca, pocos, pocas + [noun] = little / not much / few / not many + [noun] María come poco pan. - Maria doesn't eat much bread. En esta casa entra muy poca luz. - In this house there's very little light. Tengo pocos caramelos. - I have few candies. Tengo pocas cosas que llevar. - I have few things to carry. Poco and poca are used with a singular noun to express little/not much (of), while pocos and pocas are used with a plural noun to express few/not many (of). Mucho, mucha, muchos, muchas + [noun] = much / a lot of / many + [noun] Alberto come mucho queso, ¡le encanta! - Alberto eats a lot of cheese, he loves it! Nosotros tenemos mucha energía. - We have a lot of energy. Ellos poseen muchos coches. - They own many cars. Ella visita muchas veces a sus padres. - She visits her parents often [lit: many times]. Mucho and mucha are used with a singular noun to express much/a lot of, while muchos and muchas are used with a plural noun to express many/a lot of. Demasiado, demasiada, demasiados, demasiadas + [noun] = too much / too many + [noun] Tenemos demasiado dinero. - We have too much money. Hay demasiada fruta en la nevera. - There is too much fruit in the fridge. En Londres hay demasiados días grises. - There are too many grey days in London. Tengo que esperar demasiadas horas para que me vea un médico. - I have to wait too many hours for a doctor to see me. Demasiado and demasiada are used with a singular noun to express too much (of), while demasiados and demasiadas are used with a plural noun to express too many (of). Tanto, tanta, tantos, tantas + [noun] = so much / so many + [noun] Tanto dinero no da la felicidad. - So much money doesn't bring happiness. Tanta luz no es buena para sacar fotos. - So much light is not good for taking photos. Después de tantos años mantenemos el contacto. - After so many years we keep in touch. Con tantas explicaciones no entiendo bien el problema. - With so many explanations I don't really understand the problem. Tanto and tanta are used with a singular noun to express so much (of), while tantos and tantas are used with a plural noun to express so many (of). Bastante, bastantes + [noun] = enough (of) + [noun] Tenemos bastante pan para cenar. - We have enough bread for dinner. Hay bastantes clientes en la tienda. - There are enough customers in the shop. Bastante is used with a singular noun to express enough (of), while bastantes is used with a plural noun to express enough (of). Bastante / bastantes do not agree in gender: they keep the same form in masculine and feminine!

Using demasiado, bastante, suficiente, poco, tanto and mucho to express quantity (quantitative pronouns)

Poco (little), mucho (much), demasiado (too much), bastante (enough, quite a lot), tanto (so much), suficiente (enough) all express a non-defined quantity. Note that in Spanish these adjectives agree with the noun they refer to.When they function as pronouns, the nouns they refer to will have been mentioned before, but they still agree with the noun. Let's see how to use them! Poco, poca, pocos, pocas = little / not much / few / not many -María come poco pan. -Sí, come muy poco.-María doesn't eat much bread. -Yes, she eats very little. -Me parece que en esta casa entra muy poca luz. -Tienes razón, entra muy poca.-It seems to me that in this house there's very little light. -You're right, there's not much. -Tengo pocos caramelos. -Sí, tienes pocos.-I have few candies. -Yes, you have few. -¿Tienes suficientes sillas para todos? -No, tengo pocas.-Do you have enough chairs for everyone? -No, I [only] have a few. Poco and poca are used to replace a singular noun to express little/not much (of), while pocos and pocas are used to replace a plural noun to express few/not many (of): Quantitative Adjective MasculineFeminine Singular pocolittle/not muchpocalittle/not much Plural pocosfew/not many pocasfew/not many Mucho, mucha, muchos, muchas = much / a lot of / many -Alberto come mucho queso, ¡le encanta! -Es verdad, Alberto come mucho.-Alberto eats a lot of cheese, he loves it! -True, Alberto eats a lot. -¡Nosotros tenemos mucha energía! -Sí, vosotros tenéis mucha.-We have a lot of energy! -Yes, you have a lot. -¿Es cierto que ellos tienen muchos coches? -Sí, ellos tienen muchos.-Is it true that they own many cars? -Yes, they own many. -He oído que ella tiene muchas amigas. -Sí, ella tiene muchas.-I heard that she has many female friends. -Yes, she has many. Mucho and mucha are used to replace a singular noun to express much/a lot of, while muchos and muchas are used to replace a plural noun to express many/a lot of: Quantitative Adjective MasculineFeminine Singular muchomuch/a lot ofmuchamuch/a lot of Plural muchosmany/a lot of muchasmany/a lot of Demasiado, demasiada, demasiados, demasiadas = too much / too many -Tenemos demasiado dinero. -¡Es fantástico tener demasiado!-We have too much money. -It's fantastic to have too much! -Hay demasiada fruta en la nevera.-Sí, hay demasiada.-There is too much fruit in the fridge. -Yes, there is too much. -En Londres hay demasiados días grises. -Estoy de acuerdo, hay demasiados.-There are too many grey days in London. -I agree, there are too many. -¡Tenemos demasiadas reglas en mi colegio! -¡Sí, demasiadas!-We have too many rules in my school! -Yes, too many! Demasiado and demasiada are used to replace a singular noun to express too much (of), while demasiados and demasiadas are used to replace a plural noun to express too many (of). Quantitative Adjective MasculineFeminine Singular demasiadotoo much (of)demasiadatoo much (of) Plural demasiadostoo many (of) demasiadastoo many (of) Tanto, tanta, tantos, tantas = so much / so many -Tanto dinero no da la felicidad.-Es cierto. Tanto no da la felicidad.-So much money doesn't bring happiness. -It's true, so much doesn't bring happiness. -Tanta luz no es buena para sacar fotos. -No, tanta no es buena.-This much light is not good for taking photos. -No, this much is not good. -Me he comido 10 caramelos! -¿Por qué tantos?-I ate 10 sweets! -Why so many? -No puedes poner tantas manzanas en la cesta.-¿Por qué no puedo poner tantas?-You cannot put so many apples in the basket. -Why can't I put that many? Tanto and tanta are used to replace a singular noun to express so much (of), while tantos and tantas are used to replace a plural noun to express so many (of): Quantitative Adjective MasculineFeminine Singular tantoso muchtantaso much Plural tantosso many tantasso many Bastante, bastantes = enough/quite a lot -¿Tenemos bastante pan para cenar? -Sí, tenemos bastante.-Do we have enough bread for dinner? -Yes, we have enough. -¿Hay muchas cervezas en el frigorífico? -Sí, hay bastantes.-Are there lots of beers in the fridge? -Yes, there are quite a lot. Bastante is used to replace a singular noun to express enough (of) or quite a lot (of) while bastantes is used to replace a plural noun to express enough (of) or quite a lot (of). Quantitative Adjective Masculine/Feminine Singular bastanteenough (of) Plural bastantesenough (of) Bastante / bastantes do not agree in gender: they keep the same form in masculine and feminine! Suficiente, suficientes = enough, sufficient -¿Crees que Juan tiene suficiente dinero para ir al cine? -Sí, no te preocupes, tiene suficiente.-Do you think that Juan has enough money to go to the cinema? -Yes, don't worry, he's got enough. -Pienso que Elisa vio suficientes museos en Londres. -Sí, Elisa vio suficientes.-I think that Elisa saw enough museums in London. -Yes, Elisa saw enough in London. Suficiente is used to replace a singular noun to express enough (of) or sufficient while suficientes is used to replace a plural noun to express enough (of) or sufficient: Quantitative Adjective Masculine/Feminine Singular suficienteenough (of), sufficient Plural suficientesenough (of), sufficient Suficiente / suficientes do not agree in gender: they keep the same form in masculine and feminine! Bastante and suficiente can both mean enough (of something) so they are interchangeable when used in this way, but only bastante can mean quite a lot (of something).

Which are the three interchangeable ways of saying: You could have [done something]

Poder: El Pretérito Indefinido + El Infinitivo Compuesto - Gabriela pudo haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue. El Pretérito Imperfecto + El Infinitivo Compuesto - Gabriela podía haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue. El Condicional Simple + El Infinitivo Compuesto - Gabriela podría haber ido a la universidad de Exeter pero no fue.

Difference between porque and por qué (because and why)

Porque = because Por qué = why Porque: Porque is a conjunction that introduces a subordinate sentence and introduces cause. It will never have an accent and it is a single word. Its direct English translation is because. For example: Nunca veo la televisión porque no ponen nada interesante. - I never watch TV because they never show anything interesting. Por qué: Por qué is written as two separate words and has a written accent on qué. It is used in both direct and indirect interrogative sentences. Its direct English translation is why. For example: ¿Por qué trabajas tantas horas al día? - Why do you work so many hours a day? Ella me preguntó por qué trabajaba tanto. - She asked me why I worked so much.

Difference between porqué and por que (noun vs preposition + conjunction)

Porqué = a reason, a cause (noun) Por que = for which, that, why (preposition + conjunction/ preposition + relative pronoun) These two words, porqué and por que, although they look nearly the same, have two different functions in a sentence. Note that porqué and por que, are different from por qué and porque which you are already familiar with from Difference between porque and por qué (because and why). Let's see the difference between porqué and por que: 1. PORQUÉ Porqué is written as one word with a written accent and is a masculine noun. No comprendo el porqué de su actitud tan negativa. - I don't understand the reason for his negative attitude. No te voy a explicar los porqués de mi decisión. - I won't tell you the reasons for my decision. As a noun, any associated article (el, los, un, unos) or other determiner such as possessive adjectives (mi, tu, su, etc.) must agree. Porqué can be used in its plural form porqués, as you can see in the second example above. 2. POR QUE Por que is written as two words with no written accent. It is formed by the preposition por and conjunction que, and its translation is for which. However, it is often translated as "that" or "why". You can also use por que when a phrasal verb like preocuparse por, luchar por, etc., is naturally followed by que. Puse todo de mi parte por que no termináramos separados. - I did my best so that we wouldn't end up being apart. Me preocupo por que no le guste. - I am worried that she won't like it. Sometimes por que is a combination of the preposition por + relative pronoun que. In this case it is more common to use it with the article (por el que, por la que...), but it could also be omitted. Ese fue el motivo por (el) que le escribí; para aclarar la situación. - That was why [lit: the reason for which] I wrote to him; to clarify the situation. Los problemas por (los) que se preocupaba eran ridículos.The problems she worried about / The problems about which she worried were ridiculous.

Using "se" in instructions: The most common translations to English are: "You [do something]", "One [does something", or "Something is [done]".

Primero, se cortan las verduras y después se ponen en el horno. - First, [you] cut the vegetables and then [you] put them in the oven. Se unen estos dos extremos para formar un triángulo. - These two corners are joined to form a triangle. Para preparar un buen gazpacho, se añade mucho aceite de oliva. - To make a good "gazpacho" one adds [needs to add] a lot of olive oil.

Relative pronouns

Que Quien, quienes El cual / la cual Los cuales (who, that, which)

How to say mine, yours, his, hers, its, ours and theirs (possessive pronouns)

Read and listen to these examples: El disco de Alejandro Sanz es mío. The CD of Alejandro Sanz is mine. Las croquetas de jamón eran mías.The ham croquettes were mine. Elsa dice que ese pantalón vaquero es tuyo.Elsa says that that pair of jeans is yours. [you = tú] Estos calcetines rojos son tuyos.These red socks are yours. [you = tú] Yo creo que mi libro de ruso no es suyo.I think that my Russian book is not his. El collar del perro es suyo.The dog's collar belongs to it. [lit: The dog's collar is its.] Las bicicletas no eran suyas.The bicycles were not hers. Ese bocadillo de atún no era suyo.That tuna sandwich was not yours. [you = usted] Esta casa no es suya.This house is not yours. [you = ustedes] Estos cuadernos no eran suyos.These exercise books were not theirs/yours [ustedes]. Esa moto es muy cara y es nuestra.That motorbike is very expensive and it's ours. No eran nuestros boletos, sino vuestros.They weren't our tickets, but yours. [you = vosotros] In the examples above, possessive pronouns agree with the noun they replace. Sometimes these possessive pronouns are accompanied by the definite article: El, la, los, las + pronombre posesivo We generally use this formula in two cases: 1. To reinforce the feeling of possession. 1. Este regalo es tuyo. 2. Este regalo es el tuyo. This present is yours. [you = tú. The article "el" reinforces the possession.] Este regalo es nuestro. Este regalo es el nuestro. This present is ours. This present is our present. [reinforced possession] 2. When the possessive pronoun is at the beginning of a sentence. -Mi aspiradora no funciona. -La mía se rompió ayer también.-My vacuum cleaner doesn't work. -Mine broke yesterday too. -Nuestra aspiradora no funciona. -La nuestra se rompió ayer también.-Our vacuum cleaner doesn't work. -Ours broke yesterday too. More examples: -Sus viajes son a diferentes lugares. -Y los tuyos, ¿adónde son?-His trips are to different places. -And yours, where are they to? [you =tú] -Mis vacaciones fueron estupendas. -¿Y las suyas, cómo fueron?-My holidays were great. -And yours, how were they? [you = ustedes] -Mis tortillas son las mejores. -Pues las mías llevan menos aceite.-My omelettes are the best ones. -Well, mine have less oil. -Sus novelas tratan sobre la historia de España. -Te equivocas, las suyas tratan sobre la historia de Cuba.-His novels deal with Spanish history. -You are mistaken, his are about Cuban history. [you = tú] In Spanish, suyo, suya, suyos and suyas can refer to six different owners: he she it you [usted] you [ustedes] they You need to work out the owner by the context. It is not possible to use any of these possessive pronouns in front of a noun! Use a possessive adjective instead:Míos libros son muy interesantes. Mis libros son muy interesantes.My books are very interesting.

Reciprocal verbs in Spanish and position of the reflexive pronoun

Reciprocal verbs, i.e those that express an action that two or more people perform to each other, contain a reflexive pronoun (only the plural forms). Have a look at the following examples: Nosotros nos abrazamos mucho.We hug each other a lot. ¿Tú y Marta os conocéis?Do you and Marta know each other? Los vecinos se ayudaban cuando podían.The neighbours helped each other when they could. Ustedes se comunican por email, ¿verdad?You communicate with each other via email, don't you? You will always find these plural reflexive pronouns with reciprocal verbs: nos, os, se Reciprocal verbs work in the same way other reflexive verbs do in terms of the position of the pronouns with conjugated verbs, infinitives, gerunds and imperatives. With an infinitive or a gerund the pronoun can be placed: 1. Right after and attached to the verb Podemos escribirnos mientras estás en Alemania.We can write to each other while you are in Germany. ¿Están ustedes entendiéndose?Are you understanding each other? 2. In front of the whole verbal structure, not in the middle ¿Se están ustedes entendiendo?Are you getting along (with each other)? ¿Están se ustedes entendiendo? Nos podemos escribir mientras estás en Alemania.We can write to each other while you are in Germany. Podemos nos escribir mientras estás en Alemania. With an imperative the pronoun can only be placed right after and attached to the verb ¡Casaos en la catedral!Marry each other in the cathedral! We sometimes reinforce the reciprocity adding "el uno al otro" or "mutuamente" to the sentence. For example: Julián y Alberto se respetan. Julián y Alberto se respetan el uno al otro.Julián y Alberto se respetan mutuamente. Julian and Alberto respect each other.

Significado de Pronombre

Se conoce como pronombre a la clase de palabra cuya función es sustituir al sustantivo, adjetivo o adverbio.

Según / conforme / a medida que for "as / when / at the same time as" (subordinate time clause)

Según, conforme and a medida que may introduce temporal clauses expressing that the action in the subordinate clause happens at the same time as the action in the main clause. They have a similar function as the more common conjunction mientras. Let's see some examples: Según se hacen mayores mis hijos, se vuelven menos comunicativos. As my children grow older, they become less sociable. Mañana en la reunión, conforme yo apunte los nombres de los asistentes tú les puedes ofrecer café.Tomorrow at the meeting, as I write down the names of the attendees, you can offer them some coffee. A medida que pasa el tiempo, Luis se anima un poco más.As time goes by, Luis gets more cheerful. The three conjunctions are interchangeable and they all allow different tenses as well as the subjunctive. Using the subjunctive will depend on the action being seen as a future action. The second example above with conforme reflects a future action (Mañana en la reunión, conforme yo apunte...") Other examples: Según vayas conociendo a tus compañeros te sentirás más a gusto en el trabajo.As you get to know your colleagues, you will feel more at ease at work. A medida que salían de la clase les devolvíamos los móviles a los estudiantes.As they were coming out of the classroom, the students were given their phones back. Conforme vayan llegando los invitados ofréceles una copa de vino.As the guests arrive, offer them a glass of wine. It is very common to find these conjunctions with the structure "Ir + gerund", which accentuates the progression of an action.

How to write hypothetical clauses using 'si' e.g If we were to win the lottery, we would buy a Ferrari.

Si + El Imperfecto Subjuntivo + the second clause which uses El Condicional Simple Si ganásemos la lotería, compraríamos un Ferrari.

Some adjectives change meaning when used with ser or estar

Some Spanish adjectives have different meanings when they are used with ser or estar. Here are the most common ones: Ser bueno vs Estar bueno Ser bueno refers to being good as in a good person or behaving well while estar bueno refers to something tasting good. Carlitos, mi sobrino, es muy bueno. Se porta muy bien siempre. - Carlitos, my nephew, is very good. He always behaves. Carlitos, cómete la tortilla. Está muy buena. - Carlitos, eat the omelette. It is very tasty. There is also an idiomatic expression to say that "someone is hot" (attractive), and for this we use "estar bueno/-a". ¡Qué músculos tiene Andrés! ¡Está muy bueno! - How muscular Andrés is! He is really hot! Bear in mind this use is colloquial and generally used among young people. Ser malo vs Estar malo Ser malo refers to being a bad person or something being bad quality while estar malo refers to either being ill or to bad food, either that it is not tasty or it is off. La última película de Almodóvar es mala. No me gusta nada. - The last film by Almodóvar is bad. I don't like it at all. No uses la mayonesa porque creo que está mala. - Don't use the mayonnaise because I think it's off. Ser abierto vs Estar abierto Ser abierto refers to being an open-minded person or having an outgoing personality while estar abierto refers to something being physically open, like a window, a door, a place, or an exhibition. Mi hijo es muy abierto. Saluda a todo el mundo. - My son is very outgoing. He greets everyone. ¿Crees que la biblioteca está abierta hoy? - Do you think the library is open today? Ser cerrado vs Estar cerrado Ser cerrado refers to being a close-minded person or a bit stubborn while estar cerrado refers to something being physically closed, like a window, etc. ¡Mi padre es tan cerrado! No admite otras opiniones, solo la suya. - My dad is so stubborn! He won't accept any other opinions, only his own. Cuando llegué al pueblo, el ayuntamiento estaba cerrado. - When I arrived in town, the town hall was closed. Ser listo vs Estar listo Ser listo refers to a person being clever/intelligent while estar listo means to be ready. ¡Qué listo eres! No puedo creer que contestaras a todas las preguntas. - You are so clever! I can't believe you answered all the questions. Avisadme cuando estéis listas para ir a recogeros. - Let me know when you are ready for me to pick you up. Ser atento vs Estar atento Ser atento refers to the quality of being thoughtful and courteous with other people while estar atento refers to being alert/vigilant/paying attention. Luis es muy atento con sus invitados. - Luis is very courteous with his guests. Niños, necesito que estéis atentos. Esta lección es muy importante. - Children, I need you to pay attention. This lesson is very important. Ser verde vs Estar verde Ser verde simply refers to being green as in the colour green while estar verde refers to unripe food, or in reference to people, to being a bit immature or unskilled. Aquel vestido es verde, no azul.T - hat dress is green, not blue. Pobre José, todavía está muy verde en el tema de las chicas. - Poor José, he is still immature about girls. Ser católico vs Estar católico Ser católico refers to being of Catholic faith while estar católico refers to feeling well either physically or mentally. It is generally used in the negative. Mis abuelos paternos y maternos eran todos católicos. - My paternal and maternal grandparents were all Catholic. Mis abuelos no están muy católicos. Tengo que llevarlos al médico. - My grandparents are not feeling well. I have to take them to the doctor. Generally, when we use these adjectives with ser they keep the more literal meaning, expressing a permanent quality about someone or something, while estar gives a more figurative meaning. Also remember that adjectives need to agree with the nouns they refer to.

Some nouns have both genders without a change of meaning

Some nouns can have both genders (masculine and feminine) without a change of meaning according to different circumstances (e.g. geographical, register of the language etc.). Whether to use the masculine or feminine form is decided by the speaker.Have a look and listen to these examples: 1. Necesito una sartén limpia para cocinar. 2. Necesito un sartén limpio para cocinar. I need a pan in order to cook. 1. El mar era azul. 2. La mar era azul. The sea was blue. 1. No quiero que tomes tanto azúcar. 2. No quiero que tomes tanta azúcar. I don´t want you to eat so much sugar. 1. Hacía demasiado calor en la playa. 2. Hacía demasiada calor en la playa. It was too hot at the beach. 1. Nunca pongo bien las tildes. 2. Nunca pongo bien los tildes.I never put accents correctly. "Tilde" is more often feminine than masculine, but both genders are correct. "Mar" is more poetic when it's feminine and more general when it's masculine. Although it's also used in the feminine form by people who live on the sea, like fishermen and sailors. "Azúcar" is more commonly feminine in southern Spain and some Latin American countries. "Calor" is more commonly feminine in southern Spain and some Latin American countries. "Sartén" is more often feminine than masculine, but both genders are correct.

Sin/sin que + infinitive/subjuntive (subordinate manner clause)

Spanish subordinate clauses introduced by "sin que" (without [doing something]) always require the subjunctive, while in English this is expressed as "without" plus the gerund. These subordinate clauses express the way in which something is done/will be done/should be done, etc. The subordinate clause functions like an adverb of manner. Let's see some examples: Intenta salir de tu casa sin que tu padre te vea.Try to leave your house without your dad noticing. Logramos tener una conversación amigable sin que nos enfadáramos el uno con el otro.We managed to have an amicable conversation without falling out with each other. Deberíamos aumentar un poco los precios sin que los clientes lo noten mucho.We should raise the prices a bit [so that] the clients don't really notice. We can also use "sin" without "que", in which case we need the infinitive. This generally happens when the subject is the same in the main and the subordinate clauses. For example: Logramos tener una conversación amigable sin enfadarnos el uno con el otro.We managed to have an amicable conversation without falling out with each other. Hemos terminado de decorar la habitación sin dejar una gota de pintura en el suelo.We finished decorating the room without leaving a drop of paint on the floor. Remember that the infinitive can have pronouns attached to it. Other examples are: Después de tres horas me fui de la fiesta sin que pudiera bailar con Carlos.After three hours I left the party without managing to dance with Carlos. No sé cómo lo hice pero aprobé el examen sin estudiar apenas.I am not sure how I did it but I passed the exam with hardly any studying. Queríamos tratar el tema sin que los niños estuvieran delante.We wanted to deal with the issue without the kids being present. Sometimes, the infinitive (after "sin") is used when the subjects are different. When this happens, the second subject tends to be placed at the very end of the sentence. This structure is a bit more colloquial than sin que + subjuntivo. For example: Se pusieron a ver una película muy violenta sin estar acostados los niños.They started to watch a very violent movie while the children were still up. [lit: without the children being in bed] Deberíamos aumentar un poco los precios sin notarlo mucho los clientes.We should raise the prices a bit [so that] the clients don't really notice. But remember to omit "que" when using sin + infinitive. This would be incorrect: "Se pusieron a ver una película muy violenta sin que estar acostados los niños."

Position of reflexive and direct object pronouns with infinitive/gerund and affirmative commands

Spanish verbs that use reflexive pronouns are called pronominal verbs. Sometimes these verbs are used to intensify the meaning of the verb. When we use a pronominal verb in the gerund, infinitive or affirmative command form along with a direct object pronoun, there is a specific order to these pronouns. Here are some examples: With an infinitive Tengo un libro nuevo y quiero leérmelo pronto.I have a new book and I want to read it soon. Tu pelo está larguísimo. Deberías cortártelo.Your hair is very long. You should have it cut. [lit: should cut it] The reflexive pronouns are "me" and "te" and the direct object pronoun referring to "book" and "hair" is "lo". With a gerund Hay tres copas de vino en la mesa y ella está bebiéndoselas todas.There are three glasses of wine on the table and she is drinking them all. Deja algunas patatas para mí. Estás comiéndotelas todas.Leave some potatoes for me. You are eating them all. [you=tú] The reflexive pronouns are "se" and "te" and the direct object pronoun is "las" in both, referring to "glasses of wine" and "crisps". As you can see, with both the infinitive and the gerund, we've attached the pronouns to the end of the infinitive and gerund form. When doing so, you will notice that the verbs with the pronouns attached now have an accent, because they have become longer words and are still stressed on the same syllable as before without the pronouns attached; therefore they need a written accent as per rules for accentuation. However we can also place them right in front of the whole verbal structure, separated from the verb. Have a look: With an infinitive Tengo un libro nuevo y me lo quiero leer pronto.I have a new book and I want to read it soon. Tu pelo está larguísimo. Te lo deberías cortar.Your hair is very long. You should have it cut. With a gerund Hay tres copas de vino en la mesa y ella se las está bebiendo todas.There are three glasses of wine on the table and she is drinking them all. Deja algunas patatas para mí. Te las estás comiendo todas.Leave some potatoes for me. You are eating them all. [you=tú] Notice how the pronouns are placed in front of the "whole" structure. You cannot break the verbal structure placing any pronoun in between. This would be incorrect: "Estás te las comiendo todas." "Está se las bebiendo todas." "Quiero me lo leer pronto." Also notice that in all the examples above we always place the reflexive pronoun first and then the direct object pronoun. This is the order to follow, regardless of whether you place them at the end attached to the gerund or in front of the structure. With an affirmative command Carlitos, hace calor y tienes la chaqueta puesta. ¡Quítatela!Carlitos, it is hot and you have your jacket on. Take it off! [you=tú] Miriam, tienes las uñas muy largas. ¡Córtatelas!Miriam, you have very long nails. Cut them! Aquí están las instrucciones. Léanselas rápido.Here are the instructions. Read them quickly. [referring to ustedes] With affirmative commands, the only place for the pronouns is attached to the end. They cannot be detached from the verb. As with the gerund and infinitive, the order is still the same: first the reflexive pronoun and then the direct object pronoun. Bear in mind that in English reflexive pronouns are not used like this, to reinforce the meaning of the verb. Therefore reflexive pronouns will be missing from the English translations. There is an idiomatic expression that is very commonly used in Spanish to say having a good time. This expression "pasárselo bien" is using a pronominal verb and a direct object pronoun "lo". Here are some examples of this expression using the infinitive, the gerund and the affirmative command: Estoy pasándomelo bien.I am having a good time. Me lo estoy pasando bien.I am having a good time. Quiero pasármelo bien.I want to have a good time. Me lo quiero pasar bien.I want to have a good time. ¡Pásatelo bien.!Have a good time! You can place pronouns either in front of a whole verbal structure with an infinitive or a gerund (detached) or at the end after the infinitive or gerund (attached). You can only place pronouns at the end of an affirmative command (attached). In any case: the reflexive pronoun is always first, followed by the direct object pronoun.

To nominalise, to use as a noun (infinitive)

Sustantivar

How to express obligation? e.g Have to...

Tener que + infinitivo e.g Tengo que ir al colegio e.g Tenéis que hacer la compra - You have to do the shopping

Forming the imperative of tú for most verbs (affirmative commands)

The "tú" (2nd person singular) form of El Imperativo (affirmative commands) of most verbs in Spanish coincide with the conjugation for the él/ella (3rd person singular) form in El Presente. Have a look at these examples of el/ella + present tense and the tú form of the imperative: Él baila. (He dances) = present tense¡Baila! (Dance!) = affirmative command for tú Ella come. (She eats) = present tense¡Come! (Eat!) = affirmative command for tú Pedro conduce. (Pedro drives) = present tense¡Conduce! (Drive!) = affirmative command for tú Here are some more examples: Mi hija María pinta unos cuadros muy bonitos.My daughter María paints some very pretty pictures. María, ¡pinta un cuadro bonito!María, paint a pretty picture! Esther cose el botón de su camisa.Esther sews a button on her shirt. Esther, ¡cose el botón de tu camisa!Esther, sew the button on your shirt! Ella asiste a la cita del médico.She attends the doctor's appointment. ¡Asiste a la cita del médico!Attend the doctor's appointment! Remember that lots of verbs in Spanish contain irregularities in the present tense, so that irregularity is maintained in the imperative: ¡Empieza ahora!Start now! ¡Pide la cuenta!Ask for the bill! ¡Recuerda nuestra cita!Remember our date! ¡Oye!Listen! ¡Prueba la paella! Está deliciosa.Try the paella! It tastes delicious.

How to say "to have something done" in Spanish - mainly beauty and body contexts

The English expression "to have something done", often used in beauty/hygiene contexts, e.g., "I had my nails done" or "I had my hair cut", cannot be translated directly into Spanish: to have your hair cut, tener el pelo cortado - This is INCORRECT To express that someone has done it for you, Spanish uses a different expression which you may initially understand as suggesting that you have done it yourself, (despite this not being the case). This happens with verbs and expressions that are related to the body and are referring to beauty or hygiene treatments; for example: cortarse el pelo (to have your hair cut) depilarse (to remove hair) hacerse la cera (to wax) hacerse la manicura (to have your nails done) hacerse la pedicura (to get a pedicure) teñirse el pelo (to have your hair dyed) ponerse unas mechas (to get highlights in your hair) quitarse las canas (to get your grey hair dyed) hacerse una limpieza de cutis (to get a facial) All these expressions use reflexive pronouns. Here are some examples: -Pareces diferente. -Sí, me he cortado el pelo.-You look different. -Yes, I got my hair cut. ¿Te has teñido de rubia?Did you have your hair dyed blond? Elena se ha hecho la manicura.Elena had her nails done. Ayer me depilé las piernas.Yesterday I got my legs waxed. Este sábado tengo una cita. Me voy a hacer la pedicura.I have an appointment for this Saturday. I am getting a pedicure. Deberías ir a la peluquería a quitarte las canas.You should go to the hairdresser's to have your grey hair dyed. In all these examples we can assume that the person performing the action is not the subject of the sentence, but rather a professional, a person paid for their service. Using the reflexive form and conjugating the verb this way could lead us to believe that the person is doing it themselves, and while this could be the case, most of the time we are referring to having something done by a third party. We could actually conjugate the verb in the 3rd person plural (they) and use an impersonal construction; in this case it would be absolutely clear that "they" did it for you, and not that you did it yourself. However, the most common construction is the reflexive one. Less common usage: Me han cortado el pelo.They cut my hair/ I had my hair cut, Preferred usage: Me he cortado el pelo."I had a hair cut. Similar context There are similar expressions that, although not related to beauty, are still referring to the body, and these use this same reflexive structure, making one think that the action might be performed by the subject, though this is clearly not the case. For example: Me opero el martes que viene.I am having an operation / I am getting operated on next Tuesday. Deberías mirarte los ojos si ves todo borroso.You should get your eyes checked/looked at if everything seems blurry. Other contexts As stated previously, this is mostly used in these specific contexts. There could also be other contexts, although not using the reflexive form. For example, if we ask someone if his car has been repaired, we could say: ¿Has arreglado ya el coche?Have you repaired the car yet [yourself]?/ Have you had your car repaired yet? The speaker is asking if the person (himself) has repaired the car, but what he actually means is if that person had it repaired by a mechanic. The owner of the car could reply: He arreglado el coche y le he hecho la revisión anual.I had the car repaired and they did the annual check. Again, it sounds as if he did everything himself (he arreglado/he hecho) but what he means is that someone did it for him. To see other possible structures used for "to have something done" see:

Por mucho / más / muy que for no matter how much

The Spanish construction "Por mucho / más que + verb" means "No matter how much / However much + verb"; for example: No matter how much I work I never seem to please my boss. However much I work I never seem to please my boss. Por mucho / más que + verb The verb that follows is generally used in the subjunctive mood, although the indicative can also be used. Here are some examples: Por mucho que insista no le voy a dejar entrar. - No matter how much he insists I won't let him in. Por mucho que trabajes nunca conseguirás el ascenso. - However much you work you will never get the promotion. Por más que le explico no se entera. - No matter how much I explain it to him he doesn't get it. No podíamos permitirnos ese coche por mucho que nos gustase. - We couldn't afford that car no matter how much we liked it. As mentioned before, the subjunctive is the preferred mood after this construction, for both hypothetical and real facts. But the indicative can also be used as you can see in the 3rd example above. In a very similar way we can also use this construction: Por muy + adjective/adverb + que + verb In this case, muy is followed by an adjective or an adverb. For example: Ella está enamoradísima de su novio, por muy feo que sea. - She is very much in love with her boyfriend, no matter how ugly he is. Sus padres los perdonarán, por muy insensatos que hayan sido. - Their parents will forgive them, no matter how silly they have been. Por muy bien que baile, no le darán el primer premio. - No matter how well he dances, they won't give him first prize.

Darle a alguien por [hacer] algo = to take up something/to feel like doing something (perífrasis verbal)

The Spanish idiomatic expression "dar a alguien por algo" is often used to express a "sudden interest in something/doing something", when there was no apparent desire or inclination to do this before. It implies a sudden decision. Here are some examples: A mi madre le ha dado por llamarme todas las noches. Me tiene controlada. - My mum has suddenly started calling me every night. She keeps me under surveillance. Ayer me dio por limpiar a fondo la cocina. Terminé cansadísima. - Yesterday I decided to clean the kitchen thoroughly. I was really tired afterwards. Ultimamente me ha dado por flirtear con mi jefe. - Recently I've started flirting with my boss. El año pasado nos dio por el golf y este año por el tenis. - Last year we took up golf and this year [we've taken up] tennis. Notice that the verb dar is always conjugated in the 3rd person singular and is followed by the preposition "por", followed by either an infinitive or a noun. It's important to pay attention to the indirect object pronoun. This indicates the person/people who has taken the new interest in something.(me ha dado por..., le dio por...) This indirect object can be doubled by also using the form "a+ person", e.g. "A María le ha dado por..."

Using el que, la que, los que, las que = the one/ones who/that (relative pronouns)

The Spanish relative pronouns el que, la que, los que and las que are used to refer to both people and things. They can be translated as the one/ones that/who in English. These relative pronouns can be placed either at the beginning of a sentence with no antecedent or in the middle of a sentence with an antecedent. With no antecedent: In these cases it is "understood" who or what the antecedent is. El que tiene ojos verdes es el novio de Sara. - The one who has green eyes is Sara's boyfriend. El que tiene la primera página rota, es mío. - The one that has the first page torn is mine. In both sentences above, although there is no antecedent, it is understood that: in the first sentence "el que" refers to un hombre, a man. in the second sentence "el que" refers to un libro, a book. These must have been mentioned previously in the conversation so that the other person knows what they are referring to. Now, have a look at some examples that refer to a feminine noun: La que está sentada en la mesa de la esquina se llama Verónica. - The one who is sitting at the corner table is called Verónica. Las que tienen forma redonda me gustan más. - The ones that have a round shape are more appealing to me. In the first example, it is understood by the context that it refers to a woman. In the second example, we know by the context that it refers to some objects. These would have been mentioned in the conversation previously. Apart from the articles el/la/los/las which give us a clue as to the gender and number, there are other elements in the sentence that help. These other elements agree in gender and number with the relative pronoun. For example, on this example: La que me insultó era una chica morena. - The one who insulted me was a dark-haired girl. The verbs insultó and era are singular, in agreement with la. There is also agreement in number and gender with una chica morena. More examples: La que enseñaba francés, se jubiló el año pasado. - The one who used to teach French, retired last year. [one = feminine] Las que comimos en ese restaurante, estaban deliciosas. - The ones that we ate in that restaurant, were delicious. [ones = feminine plural] Las que me atraen más son rubias y altas. - The ones that I am attracted to the most are blond and tall. [ones = feminine plural] Los que se fabrican en Rusia, son de buena calidad. - The ones that are made in Russia, are of good quality. Los que hayan reservado con antelación pueden ir a esa ventanilla.The ones who booked in advance can go to that desk. With antecedent: In these cases we generally find it preceded by the verb ser. El profesor de historia es el que me castigó. - The history teacher is the one who gave me detention. Esas casas de allí son las que José quería comprar. - Those houses over there are the ones José wanted to buy. Ellos han sido los que me han insultado. - They were the the ones who insulted me. Mis amigas fueron las que me animaron a ir al viaje. - My (female) friends were (the ones) who encouraged me to go on the trip. With antecedent (between commas) When we have an antecedent followed by a relative (el que, la que, los que, las que) but we are adding information to clarify which specific group within that subject we are referring to, we add commas and the meaning of the sentence changes: For example: Aquella mujer, la que tiene el pelo negro, es la madre de Antonio. - That lady, the one who has black hair, is Antonio's mum. Here we are being very specific about who we are talking about, clarifiying which lady we are referring to. Coge un par de plátanos, los que estén más maduros. - Grab a couple of bananas, the ones that are more ripe. The speaker is being specific here about which bananas his friend should take. You can imagine a bowl full of bananas, some of them ripe and some not ripe. Quien / quienes Bear in mind that el que, la que, los que, las que can be replaced by quien/quienes without changing the meaning, only in the cases where they refer to people, not things. Quien dirija ese departamento debe ser muy listo. - The one who/Whoever leads that department must be very smart. El que dirija ese departamento debe ser muy listo. - The one who/Whoever leads that department must be very smart. Quienes lleguen a la cima recibirán un trofeo. - The ones who/Those who reach the top will receive a trophy. Los que lleguen a la cima recibirán un trofeo. - The ones who/Those who reach the top will receive a trophy.

Jugar vs Jugarse (pronominal verbs)

The Spanish verb jugar can be used with or without reflexive pronouns, with different meanings. Jugar = to play With no reflexive pronouns, the verb jugar means "to play" or "to play a game or a sport". ¿Jugamos al ajedrez? - Shall we play chess? Ayer los niños jugaron durante horas en el jardín. - Yesterday the kids played in the garden for hours. Jugar con alguien/algo = to mess with someone / to fiddle with something Sometimes, used with the preposition "con", changes its meaning to "to fiddle with something", when it is a thing or "to play with somebody's feelings" when we are talking about people. For example: No juegues con los guisantes y cómetelos ya. - Don't play with the peas and eat them now. Cristina está jugando con él. No se lo merece. - Cristina is playing with his feelings. He doesn't deserve it. As a pronominal verb: Jugarse = to gamble/to risk Se jugó su reloj de oro en una partida de cartas. - He bet his gold watch in a game of cards. No te juegues todo tu dinero. ¡No seas insensato! - Don't gamble all your money. Don't be stupid! Me jugué todo lo que tenía y lo perdí. - I gambled all I had and I lost it. In all these examples we use jugar in its pronominal form. This use of "jugarse" implies that there is a feeling of risk and that what the person has gambled may have been lost or may be lost. However the reflexive pronouns may be omitted when using this verb. If this is the case, that nuance of risk and possible loss disappears. This way it is a more neutral meaning of "betting": Me he jugado quinientos euros en la lotería. - I gambled 500 euros on the lottery. (risk and possible loss) He jugado quinientos euros en la lotería. - I bet 500 euros on the lottery. (neutral meaning) Extra note: There are some set expressions to say "to risk your life": Jugarse la vida Jugarse la piel Jugarse el cuello Los bomberos se juegan la vida todos los días tratando de salvar a la gente en los incendios. - Firefighters risk their lives every day trying to save people's lives in the fires.

Referring to a gender neutral object using superlatives:

The article to use is the neutral article "lo": Eso es lo más parecido que he encontrado. - That is the most similar thing I could find. [lit: that I have found] Lo que te estoy contando es lo menos agradable de la historia. Ahora viene el final feliz. - What I am telling you is the least pleasant thing/part of the story. There comes a happy ending.

Using para (not por) to express opinion

The preposition para is used in Spanish to express an opinion. You could say that it is the equivalent of English phrases like In my/your/his opinion, as far as I am/you are/he is concerned, etc.Have a look and listen to these examples: Para mí, hay demasiados anuncios en la tele.In my opinion, there are too many TV adverts. Abuelo, para ti, todos los jóvenes son irresponsables. Grandad, as far as you are concerned, all youngsters are irresponsible. Para los padres de Luis, su novia es muy seria.Luis's parents think that his girlfriend is very serious. Note that quite often, when using para in this context, you will find it followed by a pronoun. Pay special attention to pronouns mí and ti, after the preposition para.

Si [if] followed by past tenses in the indicative

The conjunction "si" can introduce the condition needed for an action in the main clause to be fulfilled. It can be followed by the indicative or the subjunctive. In this lesson we are studying the cases where si is followed by past tenses in the indicative. When we use si with past tenses in the indicative, we consider the condition expressed in this clause as real or very possible. Have a look at the following examples with different past tenses: Si ha llovido mucho, las calles tendrán muchos charcos. - If it has rained a lot, the streets will have lots of puddles. Si iba a la peluquería, me gastaba mucho dinero. - Whenever I went [lit: if I went] to the hairdresser, I spent a lot of money. Si tuvo un accidente, no irá al trabajo esta semana. - If he had an accident, he won't go to work this week. In all these sentences, what happens in the conditional clause seems real or very possible. We generally use the indicative here when we have had a hint of what happened and we are essentially just stating it, as if we are saying "When this happened... or "As this happened..." Bear in mind that si, as a conditional conjunction, does not allow El Futuro Simple or El Condicional Simple. This would be incorrect: Si irás a la ciudad,...Si irías a la ciudad,...

Using poner/poner(se) + a + infinitive = to start to carry out an action

The construction poner(se) a + infinitivo, prevalent in spoken Spanish, is used to mean to begin/start doing [something], to get something/someone to do [something], to set about doing [something] or to get on with [something]. This verb can be used as either a reflexive verb or a transitive verb. 1. Ponerse a + infinitivo Reflexive verb ponerse conjugated + a + infinitive Read and listen to these examples: ¿Me pongo a estudiar ahora mismo? - Shall I begin to study right now? Los niños se pusieron a llorar y nos fuimos. - The children began to cry and we left. Nosotros nos vamos a poner a cantar en cinco minutos. -We are going to start singing in five minutes. In the examples above, ponerse a + infinitivo suggests the beginning of an activity at a specific moment, usually as an unexpected action. It is also commonly used to talk about the weather in an impersonal way, as an unexpected action: De repente se puso a llover. - It suddenly started to rain. ¡Se ha puesto a nevar! - It has started to snow! 2. Poner + (algo/alguien) + a + infinitivo ¡Pon tu camisa a secar! - Put your shirt out to dry! Mi madre pone la ropa sucia a lavar. - My mother puts the laundry on. [lit: puts the dirty laundry to wash] Los agricultores pondrán los tractores a cosechar. - The farmers will have the tractors start harvesting [lit: put the tractors to harvest]. Pon a los niños a ver la televisión. - Get the children to watch TV. In the examples above, poner + (algo/a alguien) + a + infinitivo suggests that the subject of the sentence begins to do something. This time it is not reflexive but rather has a direct object. Notice how in the last example above, the object refers to people (los niños), in which case the conjugated verb (poner) is followed by "a".

Using tanto... como for "both"

The construction tanto... como is not only used in comparative sentences - see Using tanto como with verbs and nouns to say as much/many ... as (comparatives) for this - but also as a conjunction that joins two elements in a sentence meaning (generally) "both... and". Depending on what is between the two parts of the conjunction the translation may vary. Have a look at the following examples: Cuando era una adolescente me gustaban tanto los chicos como las chicas.When I was a teenager I liked both boys and girls. Tanto mi hermano como mi hermana tienen animales en casa.Both my brother and my sister have pets at home. Deberías ponerte siempre crema solar, tanto por la mañana como por la tarde.You should always apply suncream, both in the morning and the afternoon. Tanto cuando son pequeños como cuando son mayores, los hijos siempre preocupan a los padres.Whether they are young or grown up, children are always a worry for their parents. Podemos usar ese mueble tanto para guardar juguetes como para guardar ropa.We can use that item of furniture to either store toys or store clothes. Hemos conseguido formar una plantilla tanto leal como eficiente.We managed to create both a faithful and efficient workforce. Para este proyecto, tanto Cristina como David serían buenos candidatos.For this project, both Cristina and David would be good candidates. Yo me lo voy a pasar muy bien, tanto si nos quedamos en casa como si vamos a la fiesta.Whether we stay at home or go to the party, I'm going to have a good time.

Forming comparative adjectives mayor/menor/mejor/peor

The following comparative adjectives that end in -or/ -ior have the same form for masculine and feminine singular: Mayor (bigger/older) Menor (smaller/younger) Mejor (better) Peor (worse) Inferior (inferior/lower) Superior (superior/higher) Have a look and listen to the following examples: Mi hijo mayor estudia en Oxford.My eldest son studies in Oxford. Mi hija mayor estudia en Salamanca.My eldest daughter studies in Salamanca. El móvil de Darío funciona mejor que mi móvil.Darío's mobile works better than mine. La situación es peor ahora.The situation is worse now. Su hermano menor quiere una bicicleta.Her younger brother wants a bike. Su hermana menor quiere un novio.Her younger sister wants a boyfriend. Este producto es de una calidad inferior.This product is of inferior quality. El examen es para un nivel superior de inglés.The exam is for a higher level of English. Plural form To form the plural of these adjectives add -es. This applies to masculine and feminine. Mayor → mayores Menor → menores Mejor → mejores Peor → peores Superior → superiores Inferior → inferiores Here are more examples, this time in plural: Javier y Gerardo son mayores que Luis.Javier and Gerardo are older than Luis. Las niñas de Alicia son menores que mis niñas.Alicia's girls are younger than mine. Hemos tenido mejores vacaciones.We've had better holidays. Vosotras sois peores que ellos.You are worse than them. Las ventas fueron superiores a los costes.The sales were higher than the expenses. Los costes fueron inferiores a las ventas.The expenses were lower than the sales. Note: Not all adjectives that end in -r follow the same rule. See also: Forming the singular feminine of adjectives ending in -án, -ón, -or Forming the singular and plural of adjectives ending in -án, ón, -or Additional note: When using the adjectives inferior and superior in comparative sentences, the preposition used is "a". Los costes fueron inferiores a las ventas.Los costes fueron inferiores que las ventas. However, when using the adjectives mayor and menor, we use "que". Los costes fueron menores que las ventas.Los costes fueron menores a las ventas.

How to say How are you? as a greeting

The most common way of greeting someone in Spanish by asking how she/he is is with: ¿Cómo estás?How are you? [informal "you"] ¿Cómo está?How are you? [formal "you"] Depending on the level of formality required with the person, you will use: ¿Cómo estás? to greet someone that you already know, for example a young person, a child, your parents, or a friend. OR ¿Cómo está? to greet someone you don't know very well, for example an elderly person or someone in a more formal context, like in a bank or interview. There is also a slightly more colloquial way to greet someone with the same meaning: "How are you?" This is common for both informal and formal situations: ¿Qué tal?How are you? Note: Greeting someone by using "Señor...", "Señora...", "Don...", "Doña...", which are the equivalent to "Mr...", "Mrs..." etc, is a clear sign of formality. However, even when we greet a person using their first name, we can still use a formal greeting as a sign of respect for an elderly person or because we feel that person prefers a more formal approach - in this instance we can still use the formal question: "¿Cómo está?", for example: Carmen, ¿cómo está? - Carmen, how are you? [formal "you"]

Como / cuando / donde / quien with indicative or subjunctive

The most common way to express how/however, when/whenever, where/wherever and who/whoever is by using clauses with como, cuando, donde and quien respectively. They can be used with the indicative and the subjunctive. Using indicative tenses after como, cuando, donde and quien means that we are talking about known or specific situations. On the other hand, when it is used with the subjunctive, we are referring to something unknown or non-specific. como + Indicativo/Subjuntivo Let's see some examples: Puedes hacer el viaje como tú quieres.You can do the trip the way/however you want. [We already know he/she want to do the trip in a certain way] Puedes hacer el viaje como tú quieras , en autobús o en tren.You can do the trip however you want, by bus or by train. Podríamos cambiar el contrato como vosotros indicasteis.We could change the contract the way/how you indicated. [They already know what they suggested] Podríamos cambiar el contrato como vosotros indicarais.We could change the contract however you would indicate. [whichever way that might be] cuando + Indicativo/Subjuntivo Let's see some examples: Hablo con ella cuando llega a casa.I will speak with her when she gets home. [specific situation] Hablaré con ella cuando llegue a casa.I will speak to her whenever she arrives home. [We don't know when she will arrive] Le pedí matrimonio cuando estaba más animada.I asked her to marry me when she was more cheerful. [specific situation/known] Iba a pedirle matrimonio cuando estuviera más animada.He was going to ask her to marry him whenever she was more cheerful. donde + Indicativo/Subjuntivo Let's see some examples: Sentaos donde hay sillas libres.Take a seat where there are free seats. [Known, we know where the free seats are] Sentaos donde haya sillas libres.Take a seat wherever there are free seats. [Wherever that might be, we don't know] Teníamos que sentarnos donde estaba nuestra familia.We had to sit where our family was. [Known information] Teníamos que sentarnos donde estuviera nuestra familia.We had to sit wherever our family was. [Wherever that was, non specific, unknown] quien + Indicativo/Subjuntivo Here are some examples: Ofreció el sofá a quien lo necesitaba.He offered the sofa to [someone] who needed it. [Known person] Ofreció el sofá a quien lo pudiera necesitar.He offered the sofa to whoever might need it. [Unknown person] Estuvo muy agradecida a quien pudo pasarle los apuntes de matemáticas.She was very grateful to the person who was able to pass on the notes from the maths lesson. [Known person] Estaré muy agradecida a quien pueda pasarme los apuntes de matemáticas.I will be very grateful to whoever can pass the notes from the maths lesson. There are some common idiomatic set phrases using como + subjunctive: Me va a costar mucho pero lo conseguiré como sea.It is going to be very hard but I will manage somehow. -Creo que me voy a quedar en casa hoy. -Como quieras.-I think I'll stay home today. -As you like.

Using algo de + noun to express some of/a bit of [something]

The most common way to say "a bit of" in Spanish is to use "un poco de". However, we sometimes use "algo de" followed by a noun to mean "a bit of" or "some", although it is less frequent. Have a look at the following examples: Déjame algo de carne para esta noche. Tendré hambre cuando vuelva. - Leave me some/a bit of meat for tonight. I will be hungry when I return. Todavía siento algo de resentimiento por ese chico, por lo que me hizo.I still feel some/a bit of resentment for that guy, because of what he did to me. Si te queda algo de cordura no salgas con esa chica. - If you still have a some sense left don't go out with that girl. Some important points about Algo de: Algo de is invariable. It does not agree in gender with the noun it refers to. It is always used in the neutral form "algo". Do not use it with plural nouns, only with singular nouns. If you want to use the same idea a bit of/some, with plural nouns, then you must use algunos/algunas, (not algo de). For example: Podemos beber algunas bebidas del frigorífico. - We can drink some drinks from the fridge. "Algo de" is mostly used with abstract and/or uncountable nouns. Extra note: Sometimes you find algo de followed by an infinitive or an adjective, with a very similar meaning. For example: Mamá, ¿hay algo de comer? - Mum, is there anything to eat? Este asunto tiene algo de raro. - This situation is a bit weird.

Using the neuter article "lo" to refer to a clause, verb, adjective or adverb

The neuter article "lo" can refer to something that has been mentioned before as a clause, a verb or an adjective. For example: Tenías que disculparte pero no lo hiciste.You were supposed to apologise but you didn't do it. Sabes que la pastilla para el abuelo toca a las 12; ¿Lo recordarás?You know that grandpa is due to take his pill 12; Will you remember (it)? No parece muy contento pero yo sé que lo está.He doesn't look very happy but I know he is. When we have a sentence using estar + adverb like bien or mal, "lo" can also be used to refer to that adverb, for example: -¿Estás bien, cariño? -Sí, lo estoy, mamá, no te preocupes.-Are you OK, honey? -Yes, I am, mum, don't worry. -No quiero que estés mal por mi culpa. -Tranquilo, no lo estaré.-I don't want you to feel bad because of me. -Don't worry, I won't (feel bad). Remember that in translation, the English may not use the article "it" because it's not always required in every case, but in Spanish we always use it. Lo is invariable. Even if it replaces an adjective in the feminine form, it remains lo (not la). Have a look: -Dicen que la chica es muy guapa. -No, no lo es. -Dicen que la chica es muy guapa. -No, no la es. They say the girl is very pretty. -No, she isn't. It is important to remember that the use of "lo" is compulsary in these cases. You cannot decide not to use it and leave the verb with no article even though this is possible in some cases in English: -¿Estás bien? -Sí, lo estoy.

Forming passive sentences with "se" (la pasiva refleja)

The passive voice (for example "The house was sold") is not widely used in Spanish the way it is in English, but there is a way to make a passive sentence using the pronoun se. This structure is possible with transitive verbs, i.e verbs that have a direct object. The invariable se is placed in front of the verb. Have a look and listen to these examples: Se vende apartamento de lujo en la playa. - A luxurious apartment is for sale at the beach Se venden apartamentos de lujo en la playa. - Luxurious apartments are for sale at the beach. Notice that if the direct object is a singular noun (apartamento), the verb is conjugated in the 3rd person singular (vende), while with a plural direct object (apartamentos) the verb is conjugated in the 3rd person plural (venden). Here are some other examples using different tenses: Se buscan secretarias con experiencia. - Experienced secretaries are needed. Se necesita albañil. - A builder is required. Aquí se vende el periódico barato. - Here the newspaper is sold cheaply. El otro día se publicaron unas noticias desagradables. - The other day some unpleasant news was made public. Mis cortinas nuevas se han hecho en dos días. -My new curtains were made in two days. Las negociaciones se harán pronto. - The negotiations will be completed soon. One of the contexts where we find this "se" structure is on instructions (i.e explaining how to make something step by step). In these cases there are different ways to translate them into English; the most common translations are: "You [do something]", "One [does something", or "Something is [done]". Have a look at the following examples: Primero, se cortan las verduras y después se ponen en el horno. - First, [you] cut the vegetables and then [you] put them in the oven. Se unen estos dos extremos para formar un triángulo. - These two corners are joined to form a triangle. Para preparar un buen gazpacho, se añade mucho aceite de oliva. - To make a good "gazpacho" one adds [needs to add] a lot of olive oil.

Forming the passive voice with progressive tenses (passive voice)

The passive voice in Spanish can be used in all tenses, simple tenses, compound tenses and also progressive tenses. Let's see some sentences where the passive voice is used with progressive tenses: Mi amigo está siendo atacado ahora mismo. - My friend is being attacked right now. Los libros estaban siendo colocados en las estanterías. - The books were being placed on the shelves. Yo estuve siendo atendida durante horas por una dependienta muy simpática. - I was being served for hours by a very friendly shop assistant. Miguel ha estado siendo interrogado por la policía. - Miguel has been interrogated by the police. [lit: has been being interrogated] Ella había estado siendo perseguida por un ex novio. - She had been followed by an ex boyfriend. [lit: had been being followed] Mi vestido estará siendo diseñado por Victorio y Lucchino. - My dress will be being designed by Victorio and Lucchino. As you can see, in progressive tenses we will always find verb estar followed by a gerund. Estar will be conjugated in the tense needed and will be followed by "siendo". Estar (conjugated) + siendo + participle Let's see the steps required to turn an active sentence in a progressive tense into its passive equivalent: El perro está observando al gato. (active-present progressive tense) → El gato está siendo observado por el perro. - The cat is being observed by the dog. 1. The object from the active sentence becomes the subject of the passive sentence. (El gato) 2. Place "siendo" straight after estar. (está siendo) 3. Use the participle form of the gerund in the active sentence. (observando → observado) The participle must agree in gender and number with the subject. (gato/observado) 4. Use "por" to make the subject from the active sentence the agent (the sujeto agente). (por el perro) El perro estaba observando al gato. (active - imperfect progressive tense) → El gato estaba siendo observado por el perro. - The cat was being observed by the dog. El perro estará observando al gato. (active - future progressive tense) → El gato estará siendo observado por el perro. - The cat will be [being] observed by the dog. El perro ha estado observando al gato. (active - present perfect progressive tense) → El gato ha estado siendo observado por el perro. - The cat has been [being] observed by the dog. El perro estaría observando al gato. (active - conditional progressive tense) → El gato estaría siendo observado por el perro. - The cat would be observed by the dog. [lit: would be being observed] Bear in mind that not all progressive perfect tenses translate literally to English. For example: Las fresas habían estado siendo recolectadas. - The strawberries had been collected.

Using por (not para) to express "through/along" (a place)

The preposition por (not para) can be translated as either "through" or "along" depending on the context. The preposition por (not para) is used in Spanish in sentences where you express "through" a place.Have a look and listen to these examples: Cuando voy al trabajo, voy por el parque.When I go to work, I go through the park. Los chicos metieron el sofá en la casa por la ventana.The guys got the sofa inside the house through the window. Miguel espiaba a su vecino por el agujero de la pared.Miguel spied on his neighbour through the hole in the wall. It can also express "along" a place, for example when you walk along a street or an avenue (you walk the length of a street) or walk along a beach, for example. Sigue recto por la avenida de América.Continue straight along America Avenue. Me encanta caminar por la orilla de la playa por la tarde.I love walking along the shore in the evening.

Deber versus Deber de (obligation and assumption)

The verb deber (must) in Spanish has a specific use and meaning when it is followed by preposition "de". We use it to express a strong assumption about the action in the main verb used in the sentence. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Ese bolso debe de costar una fortuna. - That handbag must cost a fortune. (it very likely cost a fortune) Las chicas deben de llegar pronto. - The girls must be arriving soon. (it's very likely they will arrive soon) Ese cuadro debe de ser de Matisse. - That painting must be a Matisse. (it's very likely a Matisse) As a general rule, deber directly followed by an infinitive (without de) means obligation although its use to express assumption is also accepted: Margarita debe de tener unos 37 años. - Margarita is probably about 37 years old. Margarita debe tener unos 37 años. - Margarita is probably about 37 years old. Both sentences above are correct, expressing a strong assumption. Let's see another example: Debe haber un cartel anunciando el horario. - There must be a sign showing the opening hours. (obligation) OR - Surely there is a sign showing the opening hours. (strong assumption) Debe de haber un cartel anunciando el horario. - Surely there is a sign showing the opening hours. (strong assumption) You can see above that deber + infinitive could mean both, but deber de + infinitive is only considered an assumption, not an obligation. Bear in mind that deber (de) can also be used in other tenses: For example: El tren debió de llegar sobre las cuatro y media. - The train must have arrived at about four thirty. Los chicos han debido de beber bastante porque huelen a alcohol. - They boys must have drunk quite a lot as they smell of alcohol. And can also be followed by El Infinitivo Compuesto when we are talking about assumptions related to past actions. For example: Eso debe de haber caducado hace tiempo. - That must have expired some time ago No encuentro mi móvil. Debo de haberlo dejado en el coche. - I can't find my mobile phone. I have probably left it in the car. Be careful with verbs that have a pronoun like the last example (lo). - You can attach it to "haber" or place it right in front of the whole verbal structure, but not after the participle.

Different meanings and uses of faltar

The verb faltar has different meanings depending on the context and the way it is used. Here are the most common meanings and usages of this verb: Faltar tiempo para algo We can use faltar with time phrases to indicate the time between the moment of speaking until when an action takes place. For example: Faltan dos semanas para mi cumpleaños.My birthday is two weeks away. Faltan dos días para el vencimiento de esa factura.The deadline to pay that invoice is in two days. Ten paciencia, falta un minuto para que empiece la película.Be patient, the film will start in one minute. - Mamá, ¿todavía no hemos llegado? -No, pero falta poco.- Mum, haven't we arrived yet? - No, but we'll be there soon (only a bit longer). As you can see from the examples, we use "para" before the action/event. Faltar used with this meaning works the same way as gustar in the sense that we use the verb in the 3rd person singular when the subject (the time phrase) is singular ( e.g. falta un minuto) and the 3rd person plural if the subject is plural (e.g. dos semanas). If we want to ask someone how long is left for any event, we ask this way: ¿Cuánto [tiempo] falta para terminar el curso?How long till the end of the course? You can omit the word "tiempo": ¿Cuánto falta...? = ¿Cuánto tiempo falta...? Faltar algo a algo/ a alguien We can use faltar to indicate that there is something missing in something/someone, there is a need for something (lacking something): A este guiso le falta un poco de sal.This stew needs/is missing a bit of salt. Tengo que ir al supermercado. Me falta fruta y carne.I have to go to the supermarket. I need fruit and meat. Chicos, para montar la tienda os faltan las piquetas.Boys, to put up the tent you need tent pegs. Notice how we use the indirect object pronouns to indicate who is missing/in need of something (le falta, me falta, os faltan). In a very similar way, we can express "absence", for example: En esta reunión faltan dos personas.There are two people missing in this meeting. - ¿Estamos todos? - No, falta Carlos.- Are we all here? - No, Carlos is missing. ¿Faltó alguien en la reunión de ayer? - Sí, Carlos.- Was there anyone missing from yesterday's meeting? - Yes, Carlos. Faltar + infinitive We can express that there is still something to do/to be done, for example: He decorado casi toda la casa; falta pintar el salón.I've nearly decorated the whole house; the living room still needs painting. La sesión terminará pronto; solo falta ver una presentación.The session will end soon; just one presentation to watch. You could also use a noun or a subordinate clause with que expressing the same idea: Ahora solo falta la pintura del salón.Now the only thing left to do is to paint the living room. Ahora solo falta que pintemos el salón.Now the only thing missing is painting the living room. Note that if we use falta que, we need the subjunctive, because this is seen as something still to happen (a future idea). All these meanings and usages above show that faltar works the same way as gustar, in the sense that we use the verb in the 3rd person singular when the subject (the time phrase) is singular ( e.g falta un minuto) and the 3rd person plural if the subject is plural (e.g. dos semanas). Other uses of faltar Faltar al respeto a alguien means to be inconsiderate/disrespectful or to insult someone. For example: ¡No faltes al respeto a tu profesor!Don't insult your teacher! No voy a consentir que me faltéis al respeto.I'm not going to tolerate you insulting me. In this case the verb faltar is conjugated normally. Faltar a un lugar means not to attend . For example: Si faltas a mi fiesta me enfadaré.If you don't come to my party I'll be cross. Carlota ha faltado al trabajo más de cuatro veces este mes.Carlota's been absent from work more than four times this month. Other useful phrases with faltar: faltar a clase (to skip classes) faltar a la verdad (to lie) faltar un tornillo a alguien (to have a screw loose) Careful! Don't mix up "hacer falta" with "faltar" Hacer falta expresses a "general need for something" while faltar expresses a "lack of something/something is left to do". Although similar they are slightly different. Here are some examples: Hace falta lijar la madera.We need to sand the wood. (it is needed) Ahora falta lijar la madera.Now all that's left to do is to sand the wood. In the cases where faltar means that there is something left to do, or a certain time left for something to happen, the verb quedar is a synonym for faltar. For example: Faltan dos días para el vencimiento de esa factura.The deadline to pay that invoice is in two days. Meaning the same we could also say: Quedan dos días para el vencimiento de esa factura. Also: Ahora falta lijar la madera.Now all that's left to do is to sand the wood. Meaning the same we could say: Queda solo lijar la madera.

Using gustar to express personal attraction

The verb gustar is used in Spanish to express when a person finds another person attractive in that special romantic way! In the UK we often translate this as he fancies you, but in this lesson we will translate it as he likes you. In this case Spanish uses personal pronouns, i.e yo, tú, usted, él, ella, nosotros-as, vosotros-as, ellos-as. The verb gustar in these cases functions as a "normal" conjugated verb which is different to how you use gustar when you want to express that you like something or like doing something. Find the link at the bottom of the lesson to revise this. Most importantly, the subject in these sentences is the person who is liked, not the person who is doing the liking. This can cause confusion for learners. It can help to think of the literal translation, to say you like me, you literally have to say I am pleasing to you. See below. Let's see how this works in El Presente: yo gusto tú gustas él / ella / Ud. gusta nosotros /nosotras gustamos vosotros / vosotras gustáis ellos / ellas / Uds. gustan Take a look at this sentence that means You like me but which can more literally be translated as I am pleasing to you: Yo te gusto a ti. - You like me. Both te and a ti refer to the person I am pleasing to, in this case you. In fact, a ti reinforces te. We can omit a ti and the meaning of the sentence does not change: Yo te gusto.You like me. And, as you may be aware, in Spanish we often omit the subject pronouns, so you can also say: Te gusto.You like me. More examples Tú me gustas.I like you. Yo le gusto.He/she likes me. Tú le gustas.He/she likes you. Vosotros le gustáis.He/she fancies you (plural). Ella le gusta.He/she likes her. Ellos le gustan.He/she fancies them. Nosotros te gustamos a ti.You like us. Vosotras me gustáis a mí.I like you (plural). Ellas os gustan a vosotros.You (plural) like them (plural). The pronouns underlined in the examples above show who is doing the liking which in Spanish are indirect object pronouns because this structure can be literally translated as Someone is pleasing/attractive to someone. We can omit [without changing any meaning]: the subject (Yo, tú...) the pronouns with a (a ti, a mí, a ella...) But the indirect object (te, me, le...) cannot be omitted. Grammatical structure For learners, the main complexity of these sentences is the "inversion" of the subject when we compare it to the construction in English. Take this example: Yo te gusto = You like me Yo te gusto = You like me Yo (I) = subjectte (to you) = indirect objectgusto (am pleasing) = verb You like me = Yo te gusto You like me = Yo te gusto You = subjectlike = verbme = direct object Notice how the subject in the Spanish sentence (yo) becomes the object in the English sentence (me). And the object in the Spanish sentence (te) becomes the subject in the English sentence (you). Some students find it easier to follow the more literal translation using the verb "to please" instead of "to like"; this way the subject and the conjugated verb is easier to identify and it follows the English structure. For example: Tú me gustas You please me ¿Yo te gusto? Do I please you? This way it is more of a direct translation. Reciprocity or liking each other When the "liking" is reciprocal (i.e liking each other) then we will use the plural reflexive pronouns: nos, os, se. Have a look at the following examples: Nosotras nos gustamos mucho.We like each other a lot. Vosotros os gustáis mucho.You (plural) like each other a lot. Ellos se gustan mucho.They like/fancy each other a lot.

Different meanings of sobrar

The verb sobrar has different meanings depending on the context and the way it is used. Here are the most common meanings and uses of this verb. To be left over When we want to express that something is left over, that something remains, for example: Sobra un poco de dinero de lo que nos dieron en la boda.There is a bit of money left over from what we were given at the wedding. Ha sobrado café. Si quieres, ponte una taza.There is some left over coffee. If you want, serve yourself a cup. In this context we understand that there was a certain amount of something (money, coffee...) and that there is still some of it left (after having used part of it). This is very similar to the use of the verb quedar when it means "to remain". See Quedar, Quedarse and Quedarle (Different meanings of verb quedar). There is/are too many/much of something To express that there is an excess of something. For example: Sobran cuadros en esta habitación. Debería tener menos decoración.There are far too many pictures in this room. It should have less decoration. Aquí sobra gente. ¿Por qué has invitado a tantos amigos?There are far too many people here. Why have you invited so many friends? To not be needed To express that a person is not needed, not required, there is no need for a person to be in a certain place. This is normally said in a negative way, expressing the feeling that your presence is not needed/required, and might even be a nuisance. For example: No te queremos aquí con nosotros. Me temo que aquí sobras.We don't want you here with us. I'm afraid you're not needed/you're a nuisance/you're a spare part. Vámonos Javier, creo que sobramos.Let's go Javier, I think we're not wanted here. To have more than enough with something Used as an impersonal verb and normally with an indirect object pronoun we use sobrar [a alguien] con algo, meaning that one has more than enough with something or someone. For example: Te sobra con 20 euros. Es suficiente para tomar unas cervezas y unas tapas.You have more than enough with 20 euros. That's plenty to have a few beers and tapas. Nos sobra con saber que has llegado bien. No hace falta que nos des más explicaciones.It's enough for us to just know that you are safe [lit: arrived well]. There is no need for you to give more explanations. Le sobrará con que le pidas perdón. Eso es todo lo que ella quiere.She will be satisfied with you apologising to her. That's all she wants. [it'll be enough with your apology] Always use the preposition con in this case. Always use in the 3rd person singular: sobra, sobraba, sobraría..., not the plural forms sobran, sobraban, sobrarían... Notice that con can be followed by a que clause or an infinitive as shown in the examples. If it's followed by que, the verb that follows will be in the subjunctive. Sobra con que + subjunctive "Remainder" in mathematical operations For example: Veintiséis dividido entre cinco es cinco y sobra uno.Twenty six divided by five equals five remainder one.

Verbo modal - Spanish Modal Verbs

The verbs poder (can, to be able to), querer (to want to) and deber (must, to have to) are what we call modal verbs. These verbs add a nuance to the action of the verb they precede, whether it be an ability, obligation, or a wish to complete this action. Other modal verbs in Spanish are for example: - necesitar (to need) - tener que (to have to) - soler (to usually do [something]) - saber (to be able to) - haber que (must) Necesitas comprar más café. (You need to buy more coffee.) Tienes que ser más cuidadoso al conducir. (You have to be more careful with your driving.) Yo suelo comprar el pan en esa panadería francesa. (I usually buy bread in that French bakery.) ¿Sabes nadar? (Can you swim?) Hay que reciclar más. (We must recycle more.) Modal verbs are followed by an "infinitive". Poder and querer are irregular in most tenses whilst deber isn't. El Presente: yo puedo / yo quiero / yo debo El Futuro: yo podré / yo querré / yo deberé

Conjugate and recognise ir and ser in El Pretérito Indefinido (simple past)

The verbs ser (to be) and ir (to go) have identical conjugations in El Pretérito Indefinido (the simple past): yo fui I was/went tú fuiste you were/went él / ella / ud. fue he was/went nosotros / nosotras fuimos we were/went vosotros / vosotras fuisteis you were/went ellos / ellas / uds. fueron they were/went You can tell which verb is meant by the presence of the preposition a after the verb. Ser is never followed by a, but ir always is! Yo fui el primero de mi clase el año pasado. - I was the first in my class last year. Yo fui a casa de mi abuela la semana pasada. - I went to my grandmother's house last week. Tú fuiste campeón de natación hace dos años. - You were a swimming champion two years ago. Tú fuiste a Buenos Aires en enero. - You went to Buenos Aires in January. Él fue alpinista en su juventud. - He was a climber in his youth.

Using the gerund to say by [doing something]

We use the Gerundio in order to say by + gerund (-ing verb). Read and listen to these examples: Yo memorizo la información repitiendo mucho.I memorise the information by repeating it a lot. Marta controlaba el estrés haciendo deporte.Marta controlled her stress by doing sport. Nosotras hemos aprendido mucho escribiendo en la pizarra.We have learned a lot by writing on the board. Las cosas se consiguen teniendo paciencia.Things are achieved by being patient. As you can see in the examples above, there is a main action that is achieved: María controlaba el estrés through a second action that uses the gerund (-ando, -iendo): haciendo deporte. Notice how in Spanish there is no preposition before the gerund, unlike in English (which uses by). For example: Se pierde peso comiendo de forma sensata.Se pierde peso por comiendo de forma sensata.One loses weight by eating sensibly.

Mientras with El Presente de Indicativo or El Presente de Subjuntivo

The word "mientras" in Spanish introduces a subordinate clause that expresses an action that is taking place at the same time as another (while) or a condition that is needed to fulfil the action in the main clause (as long as). Let's see some examples: Mientras tú ves la televisión yo friego los platos.While you watch television I do the dishes. Carla se maquilla mientras conduce.Carla puts on her make up while she is driving. Acepto tu oferta mientras me pagues lo que prometes.I'll accept your offer as long as you pay what you are promising. Puedes salir con tus amigos mientras yo pueda salir con mis amigas.You can go out with your friends as long as I can go out with my friends. Notice how in all the examples above we are using "mientras". However, in the first two examples "mientras" is followed by El Presente and it is translated as "while". In the last two examples "mientras" is followed by El Presente de Subjuntivo and it is translated by "as long as". Let's see the difference between these two nearly identical sentences: Vemos tu programa favorito, mientras tú preparas la cena.We watch your favourite program while you make dinner. Vemos tu programa favorito, mientras tú prepares la cena.We'll watch your favourite program as long as you make dinner. In the first example where we use El Presente (preparas) there are two actions happening at the same time (watching his favourite programme and making dinner). In the second sentence where we use El Presente de Subjuntivo (prepares), the action in the main clause (watching his favourite programme) happens only if the condition expressed with "mientras" is fulfilled (only if he makes dinner). Here is another example to compare: No me importa dormir en el suelo mientras tú duermes en la cama.I don't mind sleeping on the floor while you sleep on the bed. In the sentence above two actions happen at the same time (El Presente) No me importa dormir en el suelo mientras tú duermas en la cama.I don't mind sleeping on the floor as long as you sleep on the bed. Here, there is a condition to fulfil the action (El Presente de Subjuntivo ) Note that we can also use "siempre que..." or "mientras que..."with the same meaning as "mientras" (as long as). For example: Te invito a un café mientras me ayudes a estudiar después.Te invito a un café mientras que me ayudes a estudiar después.Te invito a un café siempre que me ayudes a estudiar después.I'll buy you a coffee as long as you help me study later. Remember: mientras + El Presente = while mientras + El Presente de Subjuntivo = as long as / only if Note: Sometimes, in sentences using the future tense in the main clause, mientras could also mean while when followed by the subjunctive. In this case, we will be talking about two actions that may happen at the same time. For example: "Lola bailará mientras nosotros cantemos." The meaning of this sentence could be: 1. Lola will dance as long as we sing. (only if we sing she will dance) 2. Lola will dance while we sing. (for as long as/while we sing she will dance -two possible actions happening at the same time)

Using cuál/cuáles = which/what (interrogative pronouns)

The words cuál and cuáles are used to express which/which one/s in both direct and indirect interrogative sentences in Spanish. Have a look at these direct questions: - ¿Cuál es tu coche? - El blanco.- Which one is your car? - The white one. - ¿Cuál es su casa? - La más alta.- Which one is her house? - The tallest. En esta tienda hay flores bonitas, ¿cuáles prefieres?In this shop there are pretty flowers, which ones do you prefer? De todos esos cuadros, ¿cuáles has pintado tú?Out of all those paintings, which ones did you paint? See how in the examples above there are two forms: cuál for singular nouns cuáles for plural nouns There is no distinction between genders, just singular and plural. Have a look at these indirect questions: Dime cuál te gusta más.Tell me which one you like the most. Ella quería saber cuáles eran mis intenciones.She wanted to know what my intentions were. Debes preguntar al médico cuáles son los efectos secundarios de las pastillas.You must ask the doctor what are the side effects of the pills. cuál and cuáles always have a written accent [´] and are not preceded by articles, as opposed to el cual/la cual/los cuales/las cuales which are relative pronouns. To learn about these see Que/ el cual/ la cual/ los cuales/ quien/ quienes = who, that, which (relative pronouns).

Quedarse + [gerund] = to do something continuously

There are different ways to express continuity in Spanish. One of them is with the verb "quedarse". It is formed with the verb quedar in its reflexive form followed by the gerund of the main verb. Quedar(se) [conjugated] + [gerund of main verb] The nuance here is "to continue doing something" or "to carry on doing something". This structure can be used in all tenses. Have a look and listen to these examples: Miguel siempre se queda mirándome a los ojos cuando estamos juntos. - Miguel always looks [continuously looks] into my eyes when we are together. Nos quedamos esperando el autobús hasta tarde. - We kept waiting for the bus until late. Antes siempre me quedaba trabajando hasta tarde. Ahora no. - Before, I used to continue working until late. Not any more. No me gusta que os quedéis viendo películas hasta tan tarde. - I don't like that you stay up watching films so late. Remember to use the gerund form (English -ing form) after the verb quedarse. Se quedó mirando al bebé con dulzura. - She kept looking at the baby sweetly. Extra note: It is important to know that in Spanish, this sometimes implies that the action "suddenly starts at that moment and then continues". For example: I am walking and cross paths with a man, then he suddenly looks at me (he wasn't looking at me before) and doesn't look away but carries on looking. In this case I'd say: Mientras caminaba, un hombre se quedó mirándome.While I was walking, a man started (and continued) looking at me.

Difference between cómo and como (with and without an accent)

There are words in Spanish which change their meaning simply when you use a written accent. Let's look at como vs cómo. Cómo with an accent Cómo is used in both direct and indirect exclamatory and interrogative sentences, it is generally translated as how. For example: ¿Cómo tomas el té? ¿Con leche y sin azúcar?How do you take your tea? Milk no sugar? No recuerdo cómo tomas el té. ¿Con leche y sin azúcar?I can't remember how you take your tea. Milk no sugar? ¡Cómo canta Shakira!Shakira sings so well! [lit: How Shakira sings!] Como without an accent Como is a conjunction. It can be translated by as or like when it is used to introduce a comparison or a subordinate clause. For example: Como te decía antes, esa chica es muy vanidosa.As I was saying before, that girl is very vain. No he conocido nunca a nadie como tú.I've never met anyone like you. Como [verb] without an accent Bear in mind that como (without an accent) can also mean I eat (from regular verb comer, to eat.) Yo no como verduras nuncaI never eat vegetables. Remember: Como = as, like (verb = I eat) Cómo = how

Using preposition a + infinitive to express a command

There is a verbal structure in Spanish that is used to express a command: Preposition "a" + Infinitivo With this structure we don't need to specify who the command is directed to, so it is used to ask whoever is in front of you to do something. It can be one or more people. Have a look and listen to these examples: The situation is "it is noisy". Someone says: ¡A callar! Be quiet! The situation is "the food is ready at the table". Someone says:¡A comer!Let's eat! When the verb is a pronominal verb, remember to keep the reflexive pronoun "se". For example: ¡A lavarse las manos!Wash your hands! It is also acceptable to use the specific reflexive pronoun te (i.e. when the command is directed to one person) os (i.e. when the command is directed to more than one person) Andrés, ¡A lavarte las manos!Andrés, wash your hands! Vosotros dos, ¡A lavaros las manos!You two, wash your hands! We don't use this type of command to ask someone to "not" do something, for example: ¡A no pintar en la pared! (Don't paint on the wall!) In these cases, we would use the more usual form for negative commands. See also Forming simple negative commands : No + El Presente de Subjuntivo (present subjunctive) As a general rule, remember that the verbal form after a preposition (a, de, por, para, en...) is an infinitive. Have a look at this example: ¡Todos a bailar! (Let's all dance!)¡Todos a bailando!¡Todos a bailamos!

Using dársele bien/mal algo to say you are good/bad at something/doing something

When we want to express that we are good or bad at something or at doing something, we can use the verb dar in the following way: darse [a alguien] bien/mal [algo] Let's see some examples using the present tense: Se me da bien el tenis.I am good at tennis. Se me dan mal las matemáticas.I am bad at maths. Se le da bien jugar con niños pequeños.She/he is / You [formal singular] are good at playing with small children. Se os dan bien los instrumentos de cuerda.You [plural informal] are good at string instruments. Puedo ver que se te da muy mal el bádminton. ¡Prueba el baloncesto!I can see that you are not very good at badmington. Try basketball! There are several things to highlight and remember about this structure: The verb is always used in its pronominal form (darse bien/mal) To indicate the person who is good or bad at something we use the indirect object pronouns (me, te, le, nos, os, les), and these are placed between se and the verb dar conjugated, e.g, se me da..., se os dan... This structure works the same way gustar does, so we use the verb in the 3rd person singular if we are talking about being good or bad at something (singular) or an activity using the infinitive, e.g, se me da bien el tenis or se me da bien jugar al tenis. But if we are talking about something that is plural we use the verb in the 3rd person plural, e.g. se me dan mal las matemáticas. As with the verb gustar, we always use the definite article with what you are good/bad at, e.g "el tenis, las matemáticas..." If we mention more precisely who is good/bad at something, then we need to use "a + who", or "a + pronoun", as the following examples show: A Francisco se le da muy mal entretener a los invitados.Francisco is not very good at entertaining guests. A mis padres se les da bien organizar barbacoas.My parents are very good at organising barbecues. A mí se me da bien contar chistes.I am good at telling jokes. Remember to use the preposition "a" -it is a common mistake to omit it: Mis padres se les da bien organizar barbacoas. We often use the adverbs bien/mal for well and bad/badly, but you could also use other similar adverbs like: genial, estupendamente, fatal, de maravilla... A mí siempre se me ha dado fatal hablar en público.I've always been awful at speaking in public. A mi abuela se le da de maravilla hacer punto.My grandma is great at knitting. This structure can be used with different tenses in the past and future as well but the past tenses that are more frequently and more naturally used with this expression are El Pretérito Imperfecto and El Pretérito Perfecto. Have a look at some examples: Cuando eras pequeño, ¿se te daba bien montar en monopatín?When you were little, where you any good at skateboarding? A Lucía se le daban de maravilla los crucigramas pero ahora no le interesan.Lucía was really good at crosswords but now she is not interested. A usted nunca se le ha dado muy bien hablar en público, ¿verdad?You have never been very good at speaking in public, have you? [formal singular "you"] Siempre se os ha dado fatal mentir.You've always been really bad at lying. [informal plural "you"] Bear in mind that we can also place the subject, i.e. what one is good/bad at in the beginning of the sentence without changing the meaning, for example: El piano se me da fatal pero la trompeta se me da genial.I play the piano really badly but I'm really good at the trumpet. Los idiomas en general siempre se me han dado muy bien. I've always been very good at languages in general. The equivalent in a simpler way for this structure could be: ser + adjective + en [noun]/gerund For example: Yo soy muy bueno en bádminton.I'm very good at badminton. Yo soy muy bueno jugando al bádminton.I'm very good at playing badminton. Carlos es malísimo en matemáticas.Carlos is really bad at maths. Carlos es malísimo resolviendo problemas de matemáticas.Carlos is really bad at solving mathematical problems.

Superlatives -ísimo with adjectives ending in -o, -io, -l and -ar

When we want to say "extremely [adjective/adverb]" in Spanish, we sometimes use the endings -ísimo, -ísima, -ísimos, -ísimas, as an alternative to muy, super, realmente; for example: muy caro, super caro, realmente caro, carísimo. Superlative of adjectives ending in a single vowel: Read and listen to these examples: Mi mejor amigo Adrián es listísimo. - My best friend Adrian is very clever. (adjective: listo) María es lentísima haciendo los deberes. - Maria is extremely slow doing her homework. (adjective: lento) Aquí venden unas pulseras carísimas. - Here they sell extremely expensive bracelets. (adjective: caro) La profesora nueva es inteligentísima. - The new teacher is really intelligent. (adjective: inteligente) If the adjective ends in a single vowel, the vowel is removed and replaced by -ísimo, -ísima, -ísimos or -ísimas. Superlative of adjectives ending in -io If the adjective ends in -io, then both vowels are removed and replaced by -ísimo, -ísima, -ísimos or -ísimas. Tienes que lavar tu coche; está sucísimo. - You have to clean your car; it's extremely dirty. (adjective: sucio) Nos hemos comprado un apartamento con un salón amplísimo. - We've bought an apartment with an extremely spacious living room. (adjective: amplio) Las instalaciones del hotel están limpísimas - .The hotel facilities are extremely clean. (adjective: limpio) Mis dos cuñados son serísimos. - My two brothers-in-law are extremely serious. (adjective: serio) Mis dos cuñados son seriecísimos. - My two brothers-in-law are extremely serious. (adjective: serio) As you can see in the last examples above, the adjective "serio" (serious) admits two different superlatives: serísimo and seriecísimo Superlative of adjectives ending in -l and -ar If the adjective ends in -l or -ar, the superlative suffix is simply added to the end of the word (no letters are removed). Este ejercicio me parece dificilísimo. - I find this exercise extremely difficult. (adjective: difícil) Las preguntas del examen eran facilísimas. - The questions in the exam were extremely easy. Tenemos unos empleados lealísimos. - We have some extremely loyal employees. (adjective: leal) Esos chicos son vulgarísimos. Están siempre diciendo palabrotas. - Those boys are extremely vulgar. They're always swearing. (adjective: vulgar) Esta canción fue popularísima en los años 90. - This song was extremely popular in the 90s. (adjective: popular) Superlative of some adverbs We can also form the superlative of some adverbs with the suffix -ísimo. As adverbs, the form is invariable, so there is no agreement with any noun; we take the adverb, omit the last vowel and add the suffix -ísimo For example: lento = slow/slowly Mi abuela camina lentísimo porque le duelen las rodillas. - My grandma walks really slowly because her knees hurt. rápido = fast/quickly Cristina conduce rapidísimo. = Cristina drives really fast. tarde = late ¡Habéis llegado tardísimo! - You're very late! [lit: arrived] temprano = early Mi padre siempre se levanta tempranísimo. - My dad always gets up really early. suave = soft/softly Habla suavísimo al bebé - Speak to the baby very softly. Exceptions Bear in mind there are some exceptions/irregularities; for example: cerca = close/near - ¿Te acompaño a casa? -No es necesario; vivo cerquísima. -Shall I walk you home? -No need; I live really close. The superlative form keeps the -a at the end. There is also a consonant change to keep the original sound [k]: c > qu lejos = far Ellos viven lejísimos del centro. - They live really far from the centre. the superlative form keeps the -s at the end. If the adjective or adverb has a written accent [´], when we form the superlative, the original accent is lost and always placed on the í from ísimo, -a, -os, -as. For example: rápido -> rapidísimo, fácil -> facilísimo All superlatives using this suffix have a written accent.

Difference between adónde/adonde/dónde/donde

There is always a bit of confusion about how and when to use these words in Spanish: adonde/donde adónde/dónde Type of verb With verbs that imply movement we can use all the forms: ¿Adónde vas Manuel? - Where are you going Manuel? Yo no sé adónde lleva María esos libros. - I don't know where María is taking those books. ¿Dónde vas Manuel? - Where are you going Manuel? Yo no sé dónde lleva María esos libros. - I don't know where María is taking those books. But if the verb does not imply movement you can only use donde or dónde. For example: ¿Dónde están mis gafas? - Where are my glasses? Cenaremos donde tú quieras. - We will have dinner wherever you want. This would be incorrect: ¿Adónde están mis gafas? Cenaremos adonde tú quieras. Function in the sentence It is also important to remember that the forms that have a written accent (dónde, adónde) are the ones used in direct and indirect interrogative sentences or exclamatory sentences. For example: - ¿Adónde os mudáis? - A Barcelona. - - Where are you moving to? - To Barcelona. ¡Adónde vamos a llegar con esta crisis! - Where we are going to with this crisis! No tengo ni idea de dónde dejé mi móvil anoche. - I haven't got a clue where I left my phone last night. and the forms with no accents (donde, adonde) are relative pronouns. For example: Voy a ir a la cafetería donde sirven churros con chocolate. - I am going to go to the coffee shop where (in which) they serve churros with chocolate. Mi hija estudia donde yo estudié de pequeña. - My daughter is studying where (in the school in which) I studied when I was little. Iremos adonde tú quieras, cariño. - We will go where (to whichever restaurant) you want, darling. IMPORTANT For the long forms adónde and adonde, it is also perfectly acceptable to write them as two separate words: adonde = a donde adónde = a dónde For example: Iremos adonde/a donde tú quieras. ¿Adónde/a dónde vas?

El cual/ La cual/ Los cuales/ Las cuales: relative pronouns

These relative pronouns which also mean who/which/that in Spanish distinguish between gender and number. They can refer to people and things. El director del colegio, el cual trabaja duro, es respetado por todos. - The headteacher, who works hard, is respected by everyone. Mi madre, la cual tiene 70 años, se siente muy joven. - My mother, who is 70, feels very young. Estas mesas, las cuales he comprado recientemente, son de madera. - These tables, which I bought recently, are made of wood. Sus primos, los cuales vivían en Málaga, han emigrado a Colombia. - His cousins, who lived in Málaga, emigrated to Colombia.

Asking questions about people with preposition + quién

To ask Whose...? To whom...? Who with...? Who for...? in Spanish we use: Preposition + quién / quiénes Read and listen to these examples: ¿De quién es esa casa? - Whose is that house? ¿Con quién fuiste al cine ayer? - Who did you go to the cinema with yesterday? ¿A quién le enviaste la carta? - Who did you send the letter to? ¿Para quién has comprado esas flores tan bonitas? - Who have you bought such pretty flowers for? ¿Con quiénes vais de vacaciones? - Who are you going on holiday with? ¿De quiénes son esos libros? - Whose books are those? ¿Por quién harías una locura? - Who would you do something crazy for? Note that the position of the preposition is different compared to English questions. In Spanish the preposition always goes in front of quién/quiénes, unlike in English where if you use who the preposition is placed at the end of the sentence. Remember that unlike in English, in Spanish the word who has a singular and a plural form: quién and quiénes.

Pedir followed by El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo to ask someone to do something

To ask someone to do something in Spanish, we normally use the verb pedir (to ask in this context). This is how it works if we express it in El Pretérito Imperfecto, El Pretérito Indefinido or El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto: De pequeña, yo siempre pedía a mis padres que me dejaran ver la tele hasta tarde. - When I was little, I always used to ask my parents to let me watch TV until late. El ladrón me pidió que le diera todo mi dinero. - The thief asked me to give him all my money. Susana nos había pedido que cuidásemos de su hija. - Susana had asked us to look after her daughter. Notice how in English what is asked is expressed with an infinitive: "The thief asked me to give him all my money" while in Spanish we use El Imperfecto Subjuntivo, after "que": "El ladrón me pidió que le diera/diese todo mi dinero." The verb in El Imperfecto Subjuntivo after que will be conjugated in the person who is asked, in this case "I" (The thief asked me...) Careful: You cannot omit "que" With "pedir" you will generally find an indirect object pronoun (me, te, le, nos, os, les) in this type of sentence as one normally asks "someone" to do something, e.g "me pidió que...", "les había pedido que..." or an indirect object always using "a", e.g "Ella pedía a su hermano que...", "yo nunca pedí a Antonio que...". In English there is no need to use a preposition: "He asked Laura..." but in Spanish you do need "a": "Le pidió a Laura que...". Be careful not to use the verb "preguntar" (to ask) in this context. ou cannot say: "Mi novio me preguntó que fuera/fuese paciente con él." Here are other examples: ¿Clara os pidió que donaseis algo para su ONG?Did Clara ask you to donate something to her NGO? El profesor había pedido a sus padres que viniesen al colegio urgentemente.The teacher had asked his parents to come to the school urgently. Yo antes nunca te pedía que me ayudaras, pero ahora te necesito.I never used to ask you to help me, but I need you now. Remember: Pedir (in most past tenses) + [a alguien] + que + verb in El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo

Using Hacía + length of time + que + the imperfect tense to express duration in the past

To express "how long" something had been happening, in Spanish you use: Hacía + [length of time] + que + verb in El Pretérito Imperfecto Have a look and listen to these examples: Hacía unos meses que trabajaba con su padre. - He had been working with his dad for a few months. Hacía varios días que le dolía el estómago. - His stomach had been hurting for several days. Hacía dos semanas que no veía a su novia. - He hadn't seen his girlfriend for two weeks. This structure is also often followed by another sentence expressing an interruption with cuando. For example: Hacía dos semanas que no la veía cuando ella lo llamó de repente. - He hadn't seen her for two weeks when she suddenly called him. Hacía tres años que trabajaba allí cuando lo despidieron. - He had been working there for 3 years when he was fired. The order of the sentence can be modified as long as you follow this structure: Verb in El Pretérito Imperfecto + desde hacía + length of time For example: Trabajaba en la empresa desde hacía tres años. - He had been working in the company for 3 years. No veía películas del oeste desde hacía años. - I hadn't watched a Western for years. [lit: Western films]

Using antes de /después de [noun/infinitive] for before/after [something/doing something]

To express in Spanish before or after [something/doing something] we use the prepositional phrases: antes de and después de. Antes de + noun: Voy a ducharme antes de la cena. - I am going to have a shower before dinner. Después de + noun: Después de la fiesta llamamos a un taxi. - After the party we will call a taxi. Notice in the examples above how after the preposition de the noun is preceded by its article antes de la cena después de la fiesta Remember that if the noun is masculine you will find the contraction del: Antes del partido bebimos demasiadas cervezas. - Before the match we drank too many beers. Antes de + infinitive Fui a su casa antes de ir al gimnasio. - I went to her house before going to the gym. Después de + infinitive Después de cocinar quiero ver la televisión. - After cooking I want to watch TV. Notice that in Spanish the verb after the preposition de comes in the infinitive form (-ar/-er/ir form) whilst in English it is a gerund (-ing form)

How to say "must have [done something] with the verb deber

To express in Spanish that something must have happened, as when making an assumption or wondering what must have happened, we can use the verb deber in two different ways: Deber (de) in El Pretérito Perfecto We can use deber conjugated in El Pretérito Perfecto (followed by an infinitive). For example: Manuela ha debido llamar a la policía. - Manuela must have called the police. Todavía no han llegado; su avión ha debido retrasarse. - They haven't arrived yet; their flight must have had a delay. Sara ha debido de dejar a su hijo en la guardería esta mañana. - Sara must have left her son at the nursery this morning. Cristina ha debido de ser una buena profesora; sus estudiantes le han comprado flores. - Cristina must have been a good teacher; her students bought her some flowers. Here we are not talking about obligation, which is one of the uses of the modal verb deber, but instead are wondering/assuming what must have happened. The reason to make such an assumption is very often expressed by a fact. For example: "Cristina ha debido de ser una buena profesora." (assumption) "Sus estudiantes le han comprado flores." (fact) Deber (de) in El Presente + haber + participio The same thing can be expressed using this structure with deber. Have a look at the examples again: Manuela debe haber llamado a la policía.Manuela must have called the police. Todavía no han llegado; su avión debe haberse retrasado. - They haven't arrived yet; their flight must have had a delay. Debe de haber llovido esta noche, porque los coches están mojados. - It must have rained tonight because the cars are wet. As you can see from the previous examples, when we use deber with this nuance of assumption/wondering, we can optionally use the preposition "de" after deber. When the main verb of the sentence is a pronominal verb (uses a reflexive pronoun) you can place the pronoun either in front of the main verbal structure or attached to haber. For example: Su avión se ha debido retrasar. - His plane must have been delayed. Su avión ha debido retrasarse. - His plane must have been delayed. Su avión se debe haber retrasado. - His plane must have been delayed. Su avión debe haberse retrasado. - His plane must have been delayed. This would be incorrect: "Su avión debe haber retrasado se. "Su avión ha debido se retrasar. "Su avión ha se debido retrasar. Note that when we use the modal verb deber conjugated in: El Pretérito Indefinido + infinitive "Ella debió aceptar el dinero." El Pretérito Indefinido + perfect infinitive "Ella debió haber aceptado el dinero." the meaning is generally different. It would normally be translated as "should have done something" instead.

A + [time] + de + infinitive for within + [time] of + gerund

To express in Spanish within + [time] of + doing something we use this structure: A + [time] + de + infinitive Here are some examples: A las dos horas de cancelar nuestro vuelo nos ofrecieron otro. - Within two hours of cancelling our flight they offered us another one. A los 5 minutos de llegar a casa mi hija me llamó para que la recogiera. - Within 5 minutes of arriving home my daughter call me [and asked me] to pick her up. A la semana de empezar el trabajo lo despidieron. - Within a week of starting the job he was fired. Al minuto de comenzar la reunión los jefes fueron interrumpidos por la secretaria. - Within a minute of starting the meeting the bosses were interrupted by the secretary. Note that in Spanish the definite articles are used (el, la, los, las), while English either uses no article or the indefinite article (see the third example above "within a week/a la semana"). Also, if the time phrase is masculine singular, using "el", then "a" + "el" are contracted: "al" as usual (see last example above)

Using todavía no with El Pretérito Perfecto = not yet (negative expression)

To express not yet in Spanish, you use the negative expression todavía no with El Pretérito Perfecto. This expression refers to an action that has yet to be completed, hence El Pretérito Perfecto. Look at these examples: Nosotros todavía no hemos salido del trabajo.We have not yet left work. Ellos todavía no se han casado.They have not yet married. As you can see, the way to use todavía nois: todavía no + verb conjugated in El Pretérito Perfecto However, note that you canalsouse it in the following order: no + verb conjugated in El Pretérito Perfecto + todavía Yo no he estudiado todavía para el examen.I have not studied for the exam yet. Ella no les ha presentado a su novio todavía.She has not introduced them to her boyfriend yet. It is important to note that we cannot place "todavía" between haber and the past participle. This would be incorrect: Ella no les ha todavía presentado a su novio. She has not introduced them to her boyfriend yet. The negative expression todavía no means not yet, but todavía used on its own has a different meaning = still or even.

How to structure 'one of the most / least +[adjective]

To express that someone/something is "one" of the most/least [adjective] among others we use: Uno/a de + superlative Pedro Almodóvar es uno de los directores españoles más conocidos internacionalmente. - Pedro Almodóvar is one of the most internationally well-known Spanish film directors. Mi vecina Lola es una de las personas menos organizadas que conozco. - My neighbour Lola is one of the least organised people that I know.

Si [if] followed by present indicative + main clause (present tense/future tense)

To express the possibility of something happening in the future depending on a condition that has a high probability of being met, we use these structures with the conjunction si (if): Si (if) +present tense, ... present tense Si (if) +present tense, ... simple future tense Using the present or future tense in the main clause does not change the meaning of the sentence. Have a look and listen to these examples: Si me concentro, termino el trabajo pronto.If I concentrate, I (will) finish the job soon. Si me concentro, terminaré el trabajo pronto.If I concentrate, I will finish the job soon. Si Amalia va al mercado, compra pescado fresco.If Amalia goes to the market, she will buy fresh fish. Si Amalia va al mercado, comprará pescado fresco.If Amalia goes to the market, she will buy fresh fish. Also bear in mind that the order can also be altered: the main clause can come before the condition clause without changing the meaning: Yo hablaré con tu profesor si tenemos dudas.I will speak to your teacher if we have any doubts. ¿Me das tu muñeca si te cansas de ella?Will you give me your dolly if you get bored of her? The use of deber/tener que in El Condicional: Sometimes, we combine si + El presente, deber/tener que in El Condicional. See some examples: Si te gustan esos pendientes, deberías comprarlos.If you like those earrings, you should buy them. Si ellos son los responsables, deberían pagar.If they are responsible, they should pay. Si quieres este trabajo, tendrías que llevar este uniforme todos los días.If you want this job, you'd have to wear this uniform everyday. Si cambian la fecha del examen, tendrían que avisar con tiempo.If they change the date of the exam, they'd have to warn [us] in time.

Using El Futuro Simple (simple future) for prediction, speculation and probability in the present

To express the probability of something happening at the time you are speaking, in Spanish we use El Futuro Simple, also known as El Futuro Imperfecto. By using this tense we do not express what is going to happen or what is definitely happening but rather we are: - speculating about what might be happening, - expressing what is probably happening, - predicting what might be happening. Look at the following examples: Marcos y Javier todavía no han llegado. ¿Dónde estarán? - Marcos and Javier haven't arrived yet. Where could they be? Es un poco raro que Paula no esté aquí; estará todavía esperando el autobús. -It is a bit strange that Paula is not here; she is probably still waiting for the bus. Este lugar no me suena, pero estaremos cerca de Madrid. - This place doesn't seem familiar but we are probably near Madrid. No tengo reloj pero serán las once y media más o menos. - I don't have a watch but it is probably around half past eleven. ATTENTION: If the conjecture or expression of probability is about the past, then you use El Condicional Simple.

Using verbs seguir/continuar + gerund = to keep on [doing something]

To express to keep on/continue doing something in Spanish we use one of these two verbal structures: Seguir Conjugate seguir + gerund of second verb For example: Sigue caminando un poco más y verás una farmacia. - Keep on walking a bit longer and you will see a chemist. Luís siguió insistiendo para convencer a la chica. - Luís kept insisting to convince the girl. Continuar Conjugate continuar + gerund of second verb For example: Continúa caminando un poco más y verás una farmacia. - Keep on walking a bit longer and you will see a chemist. Luís continuó insistiendo para convencer a la chica. - Luís kept insisting to convince the girl. Notice how both seguir and continuar are followed by a gerund, which coincides with the English structure. However special attention must be paid to the verb seguir which is a stem-changing verb (e>i) as well as a consonant change verb (gu>g). Also remember the absence of a preposition between seguir/continuar and the gerund form, as this is a common mistake. Here are some other examples: Mi padre sigue fumando a pesar de las advertencias del médico. - My dad keeps on smoking despite the doctor's warnings. Ellos siguieron bebiendo hasta el amanecer. - They kept on drinking until dawn. Los voluntarios han continuado recaudando dinero para los niños pobres. - The volunteers have continued collecting money for poor children. El bailarín continuó bailando después de su descalificación. - The dancer continued dancing after his disqualification. It is incorrect to use a preposition between the two verb forms or to use the infinitive: Ellos siguieron a bebiendo hasta el amanecer. Ellos siguieron a beber hasta el amanecer. Ellos continuaron a bebiendo hasta el amanecer. Ellos continuaron a beber hasta el amanecer. (ALL INCORRECT)

Using cuyo, cuya, cuyos, cuyas to say whose + noun (relative adjective)

To express whose + noun in Spanish we use the relative adjective cuyo. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Roberto, cuyo hijo va al colegio de mi hija, es abogado. - Roberto, whose son goes to my daughter's school, is a lawyer. Andrea, cuya jefa es tambien mi jefa, es una buena compañera. - Andrea, whose boss is also my boss, is a good colleague. Tu amigo, cuyos consejos seguiste, no es una persona de fiar. - Your friend, whose advice you followed, is not a trustworthy person. Note that these nouns can also be preceded by a preposition, although depending on which preposition is needed, the translation then would not be as straightforward as whose and it would sound very formal and old-fashioned in English: La casa, en cuyas habitaciones dormimos, era muy tradicional. - The house, in whose rooms we slept, was very traditional. Regardless of the gender and number of the possessor, the first part of the adjective remains the same:cuy- But the endings will vary in accordance with the possession:(-o, -a, -os, -as) Remember that this adjective is formal. More colloquially, we could express the same thing this way: Andrea, cuya jefa es también mi jefa, es una buena compañera. Andrea, que su jefa es también mi jefa, es una buena compañera. or Roberto, cuyo hijo va al colegio de mi hija, es abogado. Roberto, que tiene un hijo que va al colegio de mi hija, es abogado.

Using [preposition] + lo que = with, for, on + what (relative pronouns)

To introduce a clause with [preposition] + what in Spanish, use the following: [con, para, en, de, por ...] + lo que + [clause] Read and listen to these examples: En lo que a mí respecta, no tengo más preguntas. - As far as I am concerned, I don't have any more questions. Ten cuidado con lo que deseas. - Be careful what you wish for. Para lo que vale la pena, es mejor no enfadarse. - For what it's worth, it is better not to get angry. No sé de lo que hablas. - I don't know what you are talking about. Se enfadó por lo que le dije el otro día. - She became cross because of what I said to her the other day. ATTENTION: You can never place the preposition at the end of the clause like in English: Ten cuidado lo que deseas con. / Ten cuidado con lo que deseas. Be careful what you wish for.

Antes de/Después de followed by haber + participle

To say "before/after doing something" we use: Antes de/ después de + Infinitivo (not gerund) For example: "Leo antes de acostarme", "Después de cenar no tomo café." See Using antes de /después de [noun/infinitive] for before/after [something/doing something] to revise this. If you want to express "before/after having done something", then you need El Infinitivo Compuesto. Antes de/ Después de + El Infinitivo Compuesto (= haber + participle) Important Using haber + El Infinitivo Compuesto emphasises the completion of the action of the main verb in the past. For example: "Antes de desayunar" does not emphasise the completion of the action of having breakfast: desayunar. Compare this to "Antes de haber desayunado". Here there is an emphasis on the action of having breakfast being completed: haber desayunado.) Here are some examples: Hizo su examen antes de haber repasado.He did his exam before having revised. Compré el primer vestido que había visto, después de haber mirado en varias tiendas.I bought the first dress I had seen, after having looked in different shops. Después de haber quitado todas las malas hierbas del jardín, empecé a plantar.After having cleared the garden of all the weeds, I set about planting. Deberías haberme consultado antes de haber llamado a sus padres.You should have consulted me before calling his parents. [lit: before having called] Después de haberte ido tú, llegaron los demás.After you had left, the others arrived. [lit: after having gone] Sometimes pronouns are attached to "haber", e.g "haberte ido". Pronouns must always attached to haber, not the participle nor placed in front, nor in between the two. For example none of these constructions are possible: "Después de te haber ido."/"Después de haber te ido." The equivalent in English isn't always a literal translation, so you may find it is expressed differently in English. For example: "Después de haberte ido" = After you had left.

How to say the most / least + adjective (superlatives) for singular nouns:

To say something/someone is the most + [adjective], follow this rule for singular nouns: el más + [adjective agreeing with the noun] la más + [adjective agreeing with the noun] MOST: Pablo es el más guapo de mi clase. - Pablo is the most handsome in my class. Cristina es la más curiosa de mis amigas. - Cristina is the nosiest of my friends. LEAST: Ese libro es el menos interesante del mundo. - That book is the least interesting in the world. Esa chica es la menos alta. - That girl is the least tall.

Using me llamo [name] - to say your name

To say what your name is in Spanish, you use Me llamo [name]. Read and listen to these examples: Me llamo Juan. - My name is Juan. Hola, me llamo Rocío, ¿y tú? - Hello, I am called Rocío, and you? Yo me llamo Ana. - My name is Ana. It's optional in Spanish to use Yo in front of me llamo. To ask what someone's name is, you can use either the informal tú form (te llamas), or the formal usted form (se llama): ¿Cómo te llamas? - What's your name? [informal] ¿Cómo se llama usted? - What's your name? [formal] GRAMMAR: Yo me llamo is the first person singular of the verb llamarse in El Presente. Important note: Note that while these more literal structures are grammatically correct, it is not the general custom to use them when asking someone's name or saying what your name is: ¿Cuál es tu nombre? What is your name? ¿Cuál es su nombre?What is your name? (formal) Mi nombre es... My name is...

Using tanto como with verbs and nouns to say as much/many ... as (comparatives)

To say you have as much or as many of something as something else in Spanish, we use tanto ... como if the thing we are comparing is a noun, or tanto como if what we are comparing is a verb. Using tanto ... como with nouns Mi primo tiene tanto dinero como tu sobrino. - My cousin has as much money as your nephew. Él tiene tanta paciencia como ella. - He has as much patience as she does. Tiene tantos gatos como ella. - He has as many cats as she does. La gallina tiene tantas plumas como el gallo. - The hen has as many feathers as the rooster. Notice we use tanto, tanta, tantos, or tantas in order to agree in number and gender with the noun that follows. Using tanto como after a verb: Mis alumnos aprenden tanto como tus alumnos. - My students learn as much as your students. Rosario bebe tanto como Carmen. - Rosario drinks as much as Carmen. Las naranjas cuestan tanto como las manzanas. - Oranges cost as much as apples. Note that tanto como never changes with verbs. Unlike in English, you don't repeat the verb at the end: Él tiene tanta paciencia como ella

Which forms of Estar present indicative have an accent?

Tu estás El/ella está Vosotros estáis Ellos están

How to say the most / least + adjective (superlatives) for plural nouns:

Use this rule for plural nouns: los más + [adjective agreeing with the noun] las más + [adjective agreeing with the noun] MOST: Alfredo y Javier son los más educados. - Alfredo and Javier are the most polite. Las manzanas rojas son las más baratas. - The red apples are the cheapest. LEAST: Mario y Daniel son los menos groseros. - Mario and Daniel are the least rude. Lisa y Nuria son las menos vagas. - Lisa and Nuria are the least lazy. - Note that the article and adjective must agree in gender and number with the noun. El más pequeño. Los más pequeños. La más pequeña. Las más pequeñas.

Ya que/ Puesto que/ Porque/No porque followed by indicative/subjunctive (subordinate causal clauses)

We can introduce a subordinate clause that expresses the cause of the main sentence with different connectives. The most common connectives are "porque", "ya que" and "puesto que". All these are followed by the indicative. Have a look at these examples: Estoy haciendo horas extra porque necesito dinero para pagar mis deudas. - I am doing extra hours because I need money to pay my debts. Elegimos ese hotel ya que nos lo recomendó mi amiga. - We chose that hotel because a friend of mine recommended it. Debes estudiar más puesto que esa asignatura es bastante difícil. - You must study more because that subject is quite difficult. It is incorrect to use the subjunctive: Debes estudiar más porque/ya que/puesto que esa asignatura es/sea bastante difícil. No porque: However, with porque, if the causal subordinate clause is negative, it allows both the indicative and the subjunctive (without changing the meaning): Yo voy al gimnasio, no porque me guste, sino porque debo perder peso. - I go to the gym, not because I like it, but because I must lose weight. (or) Yo voy al gimnasio, no porque me gusta, sino porque debo perder peso. - I go to the gym, not because I like it, but because I must lose weight. Ella fue a la universidad no porque quisiera sino porque su padre la obligó. - She went to university, not because she wanted to, but because her dad forced her. Ella fue a la universidad, no porque quiso, sino porque su padre la obligó. - She went to university, not because she wanted to, but because her dad forced her. Notice that when we introduce a clause with "no porque" we often see "sino porque..." (but because...) afterwards to introduce the real cause. However this is not always necessary as the whole sentence could be split in two, for example: Yo voy al gimnasio, no porque me gusta, sino porque debo perder peso. or Yo voy al gimnasio, no porque me gusta. Yo voy porque debo perder peso. Ya que/Puesto que This doesn't happen with other causal connectives like "ya que" or "puesto que". These are always followed by the indicative and do not allow a "no" in front either. This is incorrect: Yo me casé contigo ya que fueras rica sino porque eras adorable. Pospusimos la reunión no puesto que el jefe quiso, sino porque el cliente llegó tarde. Here are some correct examples with ya que and puesto que, followed by the indicative: No pudimos ver la película ya que tuvimos una visita inesperada esa tarde. - We couldn't watch the film because we had an unexpected visit that evening. Nos cancelaron el vuelo puesto que esperaban tormentas y mucho viento. - They cancelled our flight because they were expecting storms and a lot of wind. Gabriel decidió comprar el piso puesto que sus padres iban a ayudarle económicamente. - Gabriel decided to buy the flat because his parents were going to help him financially. Ya que insistes tanto te voy a invitar a cenar. - As/because you are insisting so much I am inviting you to dinner. Note that ya que and puesto que are more formal than porque, which is more commonly used in colloquial Spanish.

Using infinitives as nouns with the definite article El

We can use the definite article el + infinitivo in order to make the infinitive a noun. Read and listen to these examples: El beber en exceso puede ser peligroso. - Drinking in excess can be dangerous. El caminar todos los días es bueno para la circulación. - Walking every day is good for circulation. El vivir lejos del trabajo es un inconveniente. - Living far away from work is an inconvenience. In the examples above, the Spanish infinitive is translated as an -ing verb in English. However it would also be correct if we omit the article: Beber en exceso puede ser peligroso. - Drinking in excess can be dangerous. Caminar todos los días es bueno para la circulación. - Walking everyday is good for circulation. Vivir lejos del trabajo es un inconveniente. - Living far away from work is an inconvenience. Be careful, infinitives cannot use the plural article (los) However, there are certain infinitives that can be converted to nouns and these can take both the singular and the plural article (el/los). Have a look: El ir y venir de los pasajeros nos entretenía mientras esperábamos nuestro tren. - The coming and going of passengers kept us entertained while we waited for our train. Los ires y venires de los pasajeros nos entretenían mientras esperábamos nuestro tren. - The comings and goings of the passengers kept us entertained while we waited for our train. El amanecer en este pueblo sureño es precioso. - Sunrise in this southern village is beautiful. Los amaneceres en este pueblo sureño son preciosos. - Sunrises in this southern village are beautiful. It is not correct to omit the articles. 'Amaneceres en este pueblo sureño son preciosos' is wrong Extra note: The indefinite article "un" is also used sometimes with infinitives as part of a "set expression", for example: Empezó a diluviar en un abrir y cerrar de ojos. - It started to pour with rain in the blink of an eye.

Using plural definite article + number + noun

We can use the plural definite article + number + noun (plural) in order to give an accurate quantity. Read and listen to these examples: Los ochenta corredores llegaron a la meta.The eighty runners arrived at the finish line. Las treinta palomas de la plaza son blancas.The thirty pigeons from the square are white. Note that in the examples above, the number is invariable and never changes its form. One hundred and one hundred and something Read and listen to these examples: Los cien payasos.The one hundred clowns. Las cien cajas.The one hundred boxes. Los ciento un payasos.The one hundred and one clowns. Las ciento una cajas.The one hundred and one boxes. Notice how "cien" is invariable, but when it is over one hundred it changes to "ciento". Also notice that, as with all numbers, "uno" becomes "un" when there is a masculine noun after it (e.g. payasos). Now, have a look at these examples: Los doscientos kilómetros que nos separan son insignificantes.The two hundred kilometers that separate us are insignificant. Las cuatrocientas firmas de los vecinos pararon las obras.The four hundred signatures from the neighbours stopped the construction work. Note that in the examples above, whole hundreds from 200 onwards (200, 300, 400, 500, 600, etc.) agree with the noun they refer to. Be careful because when we use "non-whole" hundreds like 203, 345, etc., the tens and units do not change, just the hundreds. Los ochocientos veinticinco euros son el salario mínimo español.Eight hundred and twenty-five euros is the Spanish minimum wage. Las ochocientas veinticinco niñas fueron a ese viaje.Eight hundred and twenty-five girls went on that trip. Finally, there are some cases where we can use this structure: Plural definite article + number (adjective) + number (used as a noun) For example: Los cuatro sietes de la baraja española son de colores diferentes.The four sevens in the Spanish deck of cards are different colours. In the example from above, siete works as a noun and therefore takes the plural form to agree with the definite article los.

Using estar (and not ser) to express relationship statuses

When you are talking about relationship statuses in Spanish, you need to use the verb estar and not ser. Yo estoy casada con un chico millonario. - I am married to a millionaire guy. Joaquín va a estar soltero toda la vida. - Joaquín is going to be single all his life long. Mis padres están divorciados desde 2007. - My parents are divorced since 2007. Nosotros estábamos separados antes. - We were separated before. Tu novia y tú habéis estado comprometidos hasta este año. - Your girlfriend and you have been engaged until this year. Mi abuela Sagrario está viuda. - My grandmother Sagrario is a widow.

Position of se using both indirect and direct pronouns:

With a conjugated verb, se is separate to the verb and in front. - Se la dimos. With an infinitive, imperative or gerund, se comes straight after the verb form as part of the same word. - Quiero comprárselos. (infinitive) - Cómpraselos. (imperative) - Estoy comprándoselos. (gerund)

Using querer in El pretérito Indefinido vs El pretérito Imperfecto

We can use the verb querer (to want) in El Pretérito Indefinido or El Pretérito Imperfecto but the meaning will be different. Querer in affirmative sentences: Daniel quiso sorprender a su novia con unas flores bonitas. - Daniel tried to surprise/had the intention of surprising his girlfriend with some pretty flowers. Daniel quería sorprender a su novia con unas flores bonitas. - Daniel wanted to surprise his girlfriend with some pretty flowers. See how in El Pretérito Imperfecto querer keeps its usual meaning (to want) but in El Pretérito Indefinido the nuance is "to try". Querer in negative sentences: El niño no quiso terminarse el vaso de leche. - The boy refused to finish his glass of milk. El niño no quería terminarse el vaso de leche. - The boy didn't want to finish his glass of milk. See how the meaning changes from "want" to a stronger "refuse" when used in El Pretérito Indefinido. Have a look at these other examples using both tenses: Nosotros no quisimos ayudarle. - We refused to help him. Mis hijas quisieron jugar con la video-consola sin mi permiso. - My daughters tried to play with the video game without my permission. María quiso advertirme del peligro. - María tried to warn me of the danger. Mis padres querían salir temprano para evitar el tráfico. - My parents wanted to set off early to avoid traffic. La mujer quería pagar en efectivo. - The lady wanted to pay in cash. Ellos susurraban porque no querían despertar al bebé. - They were whispering because they didn't want to wake up the baby.

Using ya with El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto

We place "ya" either at the beginning of the verbal structure or right at the end of it. It cannot be placed between haber and the participle - One could even place ya after other elements of the main sentence. e.g: - Carmen ya había comprado un coche nuevo. - Carmen había comprado ya un coche nuevo. - Carmen había comprado un coche nuevo ya.

Using El Preterito Imperfecto to describe a situation in the past

We use El Pretérito Imperfecto to describe situations in the past, i.e to explain what "was happening". Some of these situations are: Talking about what the weather was like Talking about who one was with Describing qualities Talking about age To say what the time was To describe a situation/setting Read and listen to these examples: En los años sesenta había muchos hippies. - In the sixties there were many hippies. El hotel tenía muy buenas instalaciones. - The hotel had very good facilities. En Madrid hacía sol y calor. - It was sunny and hot in Madrid. El paisaje en el campo era muy bonito. - The landscape in the countryside was very beautiful. Ella tenía el pelo rubio y rizado. - She had blond curly hair. Los niños jugaban en los columpios. - The children were playing on the swings. Eran las tres de la tarde. - It was three in the afternoon. Luis estaba con su novia en el bar. - Luis was with his girlfriend at the bar.

Using El Presente in order to refer to a future action (only future time indications)

We use El presente in order to refer to a future action. Read and listen to these examples: El año que viene viajo por América del Sur. - Next year I am travelling through South America. La semana próxima vienes a Italia. - Next week you are coming to Italy. Mañana vamos a la piscina. - Tomorrow we are going to the swimming pool. El mes que viene Ana y Luisa participan en un campeonato. - Next month Ana and Luisa are participating in a competition. Notice how in all the examples there is an indication a future event with different time phrases: "el mes que viene", "mañana", "el año que viene", "la semana próxima." If there is no time phrase indicating the future, the sentence can only refer to a present event. "Salgo con mi novio" (no time phrase, present) (I go out with my boyfriend.) "Después salgo con mi novio." (después indicates a future event) (I am going out/I am going to go out with my boyfriend later.)

How to express hope using esperar:

We use esperar que + El Presente de Subjuntivo to express hope that something happens or will happen. e.g Espero que vengas esta noche. - I hope that you will come tonight. Mi hermano y yo esperamos que tengas mucha suerte con el trabajo. - My brother and I hope that you'll have lots of luck with the job.

Using junto, junta, juntos and juntas = together

We use junto, junta, juntos and juntas in order to say together. Read and listen to these examples with junto, junta, juntos and juntas accompanying a noun: Había demasiado polvo junto en la habitación.There was too much dust gathered in the bedroom. Nunca he visto tanta gente junta.I have never seen so many people together. Carlos y su hijo fueron juntos al cine.Carlos and his son went together to the cinema. Las chicas se vistieron juntas en el vestuario.The girls got dressed together in the changing room. Agreement In the examples above, junto and junta agree with uncountable nouns, whereas juntos and juntas agree with countable nouns. The adjectives junto/junta/juntos/juntas agree in gender and number with the noun they refer to. Junto = singular masculine Junta = singular feminine Juntos = masculine plural Juntas = feminine plural When there is a mix of masculine and feminine nouns that need juntos/juntas we use the masculine form: juntos Carmen y Antonio fueron al teatro juntos.Carmen and Antonio went to the theatre together. Note that when using junto/junta in the singular form with uncountable nouns (for example money or dust) there is a nuance of something being "accumulated in a place" or "a pile of something".

Using El Subjuntivo after puede que to express possibility

We use puede que followed by the subjunctive to express probability or possibility (It is possible that..., I may ..., You may..., It may...) Expressing probability/possibility in the present or future: If the probability/possibility is related to a present or future situation, you will find El Presente de Subjuntivo after puede que. Possibility in the present: Ese chico de allí puede que sea el primo de Laura. - That boy over there may be Laura's cousin. No encuentro el lugar en el mapa. Puede que estemos perdidos. - I cannot find the place on the map. We may be lost. Possibility in the future: Puede que vaya mañana al mercado. No estoy segura todavía. - I may go to the market tomorrow. I am not sure yet. Puede que mis padres se divorcien pronto. - It is possible that my parents are getting a divorce soon. Expressing probability/possibility in the past: If the probability is related to a past situation, the verb will be in one of two past subjunctives. See and listen to the following examples: Carla no ha llegado. Puede que perdiera el tren de las 3. - Carla hasn't arrived. She may have missed the 3 o'clock train. Puede que yo haya sido un poco brusca, pero tenía que decir la verdad. - I may have been a bit abrupt, but I had to tell the truth. Puede que Dalí fuera muy excéntrico, pero sin duda era un genio. - Dalí may have been very eccentric, but there is no doubt he was a genius. No compres mucho alcohol para la fiesta porque puede que los chicos ya hayan comprado bastante. - Don't buy a lot of alcohol for the party because the boys may have already bought quite a lot. Both El Imperfecto Subjuntivo and El Pretérito Perfecto del Subjuntivo express a possibility in the past. Using one or the other just depends on whether you want to convey the completion of the action (use the perfect subjunctive, e.g., haya ido, haya comprado...) or a more generic action in the past (use the imperfect subjunctive, e.g., fuera, comprara, hiciese...) "Puede que" is invariable. It is always conjugated in the present tense and 3rd person singular, regardless of the subject. This would be incorrect: "Puedo que yo no vaya hoy al cine."

Using the gerund to say while [doing something]

We use the Gerundio to say while + gerund (-ing verb). Read and listen to these examples: Viajando por Andalucía aprendí mucho sobre los árabes. - While travelling through Andalusia I learnt a lot about the Arabs. Paseando por el parque, los niños cogieron muchas flores. - While walking in the park, the children picked lots of flowers. As you can see in the examples above, there is a main action that is achieved: Aprendí mucho sobre los árabes while a secondary action happens that uses the gerund (verb ending in -ando, -iendo): viajando por Andalucía. Notice how in Spanish there is no preposition before the gerund, unlike in English (which uses while). For example: Arreglándose para la fiesta, alguién llamó a la puerta. - While she was getting ready for the party, someone knocked on the door. However, we could use mientras + conjugated verb without changing the meaning: Mientras se arreglaba para la fiesta, alguien llamó a la puerta. Arreglándose para la fiesta, alguien llamó a la puerta. - While she was getting ready for the party, someone knocked on the door. Although these two structures are interchangeable, mientras + conjugated verb is slightly less formal. Here are other examples: Estudiando en la universidad, conocí al amor de mi vida. - While studying at university I met the love of my life. Haciendo unos muebles de madera me corté con la sierra. - While making some wooden furniture I cut myself with the saw. Estudiando para el examen encontré unos apuntes perdidos. - While studying for the exam I found some long-lost notes.

Using ya/ya no meaning now/already/finally/any longer

We use the adverbs "ya" and "ya no" with different tenses to express either "now" , "already", "finally" with ya, or "anymore/any longer" with ya no. Ya to express "now" We use "ya" followed generally by El Presente or El Imperativo when we want to say that we are doing the action right now, to express "I am doing it now" or "Do it now!" as in these examples: -Laura, ven aqui. -¡Ya voy! -Laura, come here. -I'm coming [now]! -Todavía no has sacado la basura. -Ya lo hago. -You haven't taken out the rubbish [US: garbage]. -I'm doing it [right now]. ¡Calla ya! - Be quiet now! To express "already" We can use "ya" with different tenses to express "already", for example: Por entonces, ella ya tenía dos hijos. - Back then, she already had two children. Ya tengo conexión. Antes no había wi-fi. - I already have a connection. There was no wifi before. Mi hijo ya hablaba mucho con solo 2 años y medio. - My son already talked a lot when he was only two and a half. To express "finally" We usually use ya with El Pretérito Indefinido to express finally [something happened] or at last, as if the speaker was expecting it to happen after a long wait. Here are some examples: ¡Ya llegó la primavera! - Spring finally arrived! ¡Ya se fue la vecina! ¡Qué cotilla es! - The neighbour finally left! She is so nosy! For "ya" with perfect tenses see also: Using ya with El Pretérito Perfecto Using ya with El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto To express "no longer/ no more" We use "ya no" with different tenses to express "not doing something any more/any longer", for example: Ya no te quiero. Me he enamorado de otra persona. - I don't love you any more. I've fallen in love with someone else. Ya no aguanto a mi jefe. Es muy estricto. - I can't stand my boss any longer. He is very strict. Cuando yo vi a Clara, ya no tenía las muletas. - When I saw Clara, she no longer had crutches. Ya no te molestará más ese niño. He hablado con sus padres. - That boy won't bother you any more. I spoke to his parents. To express "eventually" We use ya with El Futuro Simple to express "eventually", i.e. for an action that will happen eventually but we are not sure when, although it is the speaker's intention. For example, imagine your kid comes to you and says: "Papá, ¿cuándo me vas a comprar la bicicleta que me prometiste? - (Dad, when are you going to buy that bike you promised me?) and if you are not sure about committing to it you would reply: Ya veremos. We'll see. (it will happen eventually) Then to reassure him you could say: Ya hablaremos de eso con tu madre. - We'll talk about that with your mother. (We'll talk with her eventually.) There are other uses of "ya" that are more idiomatic, for example, to indicate that you've had enough you can say: ¡Ya vale! That's enough! ¡Ya está bien! That's enough!

Using the negative ninguno, ninguna, ningunos and ningunas to say not any (indefinite pronoun)

We use the construction no + verbo + ninguno, ninguna, ningunos or ningunas to say not any. Read and listen to these examples: ¿Compraste algún queso en Santander? -No, no compré ninguno.Did you buy any cheese in Santander? -No, I didn't buy any. ¿Hay alguna tarta en el frigorífico? -No, no hay ninguna.-Is there any cake in the fridge? -No, there isn't any. ¿Viste a algún famoso en Hollywood? -No, no vi a ninguno.Did you see any famous people in Hollywood? -No, I didn't see any. ¿Vas a comprar ropa para la boda? -No, no voy a comprar ninguna.Are you going to buy clothes for the wedding? -No, I am not buying any. Había muchos chicos en la fiesta pero no me gustaba ninguno.There were lots of guys at the party but I didn't like any. De todos los cuadros de la exposición no vendieron ninguno.Out of all the paintings in the exhibition they did not sell any. Le encantan las fiestas españolas pero no ha ido a ninguna.He loves Spanish festivities but he hasn't been to any. Notice how in the examples above some nouns are singular, e.g alguna fiesta, un mechero, ropa, algún famoso. And in other sentences the noun is plural, e.g fiestas, cuadros, muchos chicos; however, the singular form ninguno/ninguna is always used to express not any. The indefinite pronouns ningunos and ningunas are hardly used. You will only find them when referring to nouns that are always used in the plural form, e.g gafas (spectacles) or pantalones (trousers).-¿Te gustan algunas gafas de la tienda? -No, no me gustan ningunas.-Do you like any spectacles from the shop? -No, I don't like any.-¿Tienes algunos pantalones elegantes? -No, no tengo ningunos.Do you have any smart trousers? -No, I don't have any. Don't confuse the indefinite adjective ningún with the indefinite pronoun ninguno. Ninguno can never be used with a noun! No tengo ningún problema contigo.

Using the negative ningún (a, os, as) = not any

We use the construction no + verbo + ningún (a, os, as) to say not any. Read and listen to these examples: No leíste ningún libro de italiano. - You didn't read any Italian books. Los chicos no entienden ninguna guerra en el mundo. - The boys don't understand any war in the world. La florista no vende ninguna flor amarilla. - The florist doesn't sell any yellow flowers. No tuvimos ningún recado para hacer ayer. - We didn't have any errands to do yesterday. The plurals ningunos and ningunas also exist, but they are quite rare and add an emphatic sense to the negation. No teníamos ningunas ganas de ir. - We didn't have any interest at all in going. Don't confuse the indefinite adjective ningún with the indefinite pronoun ninguno. Ninguno can never be used with a noun! No llevaba ningún chicle en el bolsillo. No llevaba ninguno.I didn't have any chewing gum in my pocket. I didn't have any.

Ser + de lo más + adjective to emphasise a quality or defect of someone/something (neutral article)

We use the following structure when we want to emphasise a quality or defect of a person, a thing or a situation. Verb ser + de lo más + adjective Here are some examples: Este libro es de lo más interesante. Lo he leído tres veces. - This book is incredibly interesting. I've read it three times. Este viaje ha sido de lo más aburrido. No pienso volver jamás. - This trip was incredibly boring. I have no intention of returning ever again. - Tus gemelos son de lo más adorable. ¿Cuántos años tienen? - Your twins are extremely adorable. How old are they? With "de lo más" we accentuate the adjective. It would be like saying "something/someone is incredibly [adjective]". Despite some of the subjects being plural, adorable remains singular. This is the predominant gender and number, but the adjective could also agree with the noun. "Lo" remains invariable though. And so this is incorrect: Mi amiga es de la más simpática. Using mejor/peor - should be 'lo' You can also use adjectives mejor (better/best) and peor (worse/the worst) with "de lo", for example: Nuestros productos son de lo mejor que usted encontrará en el mercado. - Our products are the best you will find on the market. Ese hombre es de lo peor. Ha cometido varios delitos. - That man is the worst. He has committed several offenses. Again, even if you have a plural subject, it is more common to use the masculine singular adjective but you can also use the plural: Estos músicos son de lo peor. (more common) Estos músicos son de lo peores. (less common) "Parecer" + de lo más The verb "parecer" (to seem) is also used the same way as "ser" in this context, often accompanied by an indirect object pronoun. See these examples: Esa chica me parece de lo más insensata. - That girl seems incredibly foolish to me. Esas casas nos parecen de lo más lujoso. - Those houses seem incredibly luxurious to us.

Using alguno, alguna, algunos and algunas to say some, one or any (pronouns)

We use the indefinite pronoun alguno, alguna, algunos and algunas to say some, one or any. Read and listen to these examples: Necesito un bolígrafo. ¿Tienes alguno?I need a pen. Do you have one? A Melisa le hace falta una camisa roja. ¿Le prestas alguna?Melisa needs a red shirt. Can you lend her one? -Fuimos a ver museos. -Muy bien, y ¿pudisteis visitar algunos?-We went to see museums. -Very good, and did you manage to visit any? Tengo muchas postales de Venecia, ¿quieres algunas?I have many postcards from Venice, do you want some? The indefinite pronoun alguno, alguna, algunos and algunas always agree with the noun they modify. BUT BE CAREFUL Sometimes, when alguno and alguna are used in affirmative sentences, it has the nuance of "some random something/someone", "one or two" or "the odd one". The idea is non-specific in number and can refer to one or more items. It does agree in gender but not in number: even if it refers to a plural noun, the pronoun is in the singular form, not the plural form. In addition, the most natural English translation may not be a singular equivalent. For example: -¿Probaste muchos platos exóticos en el evento gastronómico? -Sí, probé alguno.-Did you try lots of exotic dishes in the gastronomic event? -Yes, I tried the odd one. -¿Probaste muchos platos exóticos en el evento gastronómico? -Sí, probé alguno.-Did you try lots of exotic dishes in the gastronomic event? -Yes, I tried some (random dishes). -¿Probaste muchos platos exóticos en el evento gastronómico? -Sí, probé alguno.-Did you try lots of exotic dishes in the gastronomic event? -Yes, I tried one or two. Have a look at the following examples: A mi madre le gusta recibir libros en su cumpleaños, así que necesito comprar alguno antes de mañana.My mum likes receiving books for her birthday, so I need to buy one (any random book) before tomorrow. Tenía muchos amigos en Valencia y siempre podía salir con alguno por las noches.I had many friends in Valencia and I could always go out with someone (a random friend) in the evenings. Don't confuse the indefinite pronoun alguno with the indefinite adjective algún. You can never use algún without a noun!

Using para (and not por) for precise time location

We use the preposition para (not por) when we want to say "when something takes place/took place/will take place" if we refer to a specific event. Read and listen to these examples: Mis hermanos vendrán a casa para Navidad. - My siblings will come home for Christmas. [for when Christmas comes] Te vamos a comprar un reloj para tu cumpleaños. - We are going to buy you a watch for your birthday. [for the day of your birthday] Nos vamos al Caribe para nuestro aniversario. - We are going to the Caribbean for our wedding anniversary. [for the day of our anniversary] In the three examples above, by using preposition para, we are expressing the precise time or on which precise event/day something takes place. Have a look at the these same sentences, one with para and the other with por and see how the meaning changes even though the direct English translation remains the same: David vino para la celebración. (David came for the celebration.) David vino por la celebración. (David came for the celebration.) The first example with para means that David came on the day of the celebration, while the second one with por means that David came because of the celebration. See Using por (not para) to express the originating cause or reason for more information on this last usage.

Using por (and not para) to express distribution or sharing

We use the preposition por (not para) to express sharing or distribution. Read and listen to these examples: El viaje a Japón costaría 2000 libras por pareja. - The trip to Japan would cost 2000 pounds per couple. Hay una golosina por niño. - There is one lollipop for each child. Solía haber dos diccionarios por clase. - There used to be two dictionaries per class. Por in this context is translated as per / each / for each.

Using por (and not para) to communicate price

We use the preposition por (not para) to indicate price. Read and listen to these examples: Ojalá que Miguel venda su moto por 3000 euros. - I hope that Miguel sells his motorbike for 3000 euros. Mis amigos vendieron su casa por 1 millón de libras. - My friends sold their house for 1 million pounds. Vendo el cuadro por 5000 dólares. - I'm selling the painting for 5000 dollars. Me encanta tu chaqueta. Te la compro por 20 euros. - I love your jacket. I'll buy it from you for 20 euros.

Using por (and not para) to talk about speed

We use the preposition por (not para) to talk about speed. Read and listen to these examples: Viajamos a 120 kilómetros por hora. - We're travelling 120 kilometers per hour. El barco navegará a 4 millas por hora. - The boat will sail at 4 miles per hour. No creo que esa moto corra a 100 kilómetros por hora. - I don't think that motorbike runs at 100 kilometers per hour.

Using por (not para) to express "on behalf of"

We use the preposition por (not para) when we mean instead of, on behalf of or in somebody's place. Have a look and listen to these examples: Mi compañero tuvo que trabajar por mí ayer. - My colleague had to work for me yesterday. [in my place/instead of me] ¿Podrías comprar el regalo de mamá por mí? Yo estoy enferma. - Could you buy mum's present for me? I am ill. El actor principal estaba indispuesto, así que un sustituto actuó por él. - The main actor wasn't feeling well, so a substitute took his place. [lit: acted for him]

Using El Subjuntivo or El Indicativo after tal vez and quizás to express doubt

We use the words tal vez, quizás or quizá followed by indicative or subjunctive to express probability or doubt. (I/you may or might... etc or It is possible that...) If the probability/doubt is related to a present or future situation, you will find El Presente de Indicativo or El Presente de Subjuntivo. See and listen to the following examples: No sé qué me pasa; quizás estoy un poco nervioso. - I don't know what is wrong with me; I may be a bit nervous. No sé qué me pasa; quizás esté un poco nervioso. -I don't know what is wrong with me; I may be a bit nervous. Tal vez voy al concierto esta noche. - I might go to the concert tonight. Tal vez vaya al concierto esta noche. - I might go to the concert tonight. If the probability/doubt is related to a past situation, you will find past tenses both in the indicative and the subjunctive.See and listen to the following examples: Quizá Miguel no aprobó. - Miguel may not have passed. Quizá Miguel no aprobara. - Miguel may not have passed. Quizá Miguel no ha aprobado. - Miguel may not have passed. Quizá Miguel no haya aprobado. - Miguel may not have passed. ATTENTION: The words tal vez, quizás and quizá may be placed at the end of the sentence as well, but, if that is the case, it will not accept the subjunctive mood, only the indicative. Miguel no ha aprobado tal vez. Here are more examples: Tal vez vaya a la playa mañana. - I may go to the beach tomorrow. Tal vez tengas la gripe. - You may have the flu. Quizás vuelva algún día. - She/he may come back one day. Quizás lleguemos tarde. - We might be late. Tal vez seáis felices algún día. - You may be happy one day. Tal vez quieran cenar tarde. - They may want to have dinner late. Quizás el vuelo se retrasó. - The flight may have been delayed. Tal vez los niños no fueron al colegio. - The children may have not gone to school. Both with the indicative and the subjunctive the intensity of probability or doubt is the same, so they are interchangeable.

Repetition of indirect object pronouns with verbs (general)

When a verb in Spanish has an indirect object pronoun (the equivalent of to him, to her, to them, etc) introduced by the preposition "a", sometimes that indirect object is repeated by also using the "short" pronouns in the same sentence (me, te, le, nos, os, les). Let's see how it works: Indirect object = a + pronoun In sentences where the indirect object is represented by "a + pronoun", and it is at the beginning of the sentence, for example "a mí, a tí, a ella", it is necessary to repeat the indirect object by using the "short" pronoun (me, te, le, nos, os, les) in the same sentence. Have a look at the following examples: A mí me diste muy poco dinero pero a ella le diste mucho. - You gave me very little money but you gave her a lot. ¿A tí te regalaron tus padres una moto el año pasado?- - Did your parents buy you a bike last year? It would be incorrect to use the pronoun with "a" on its own without the second short pronoun: A mí diste muy poco dinero pero a ella diste mucho. ¿A tí regalaron tus padres una moto el año pasado? (incorrect) - However, you can omit the pronoun with "a" and use only the short pronoun and the sentence remains grammatically correct: Me diste muy poco dinero pero le diste mucho. - You gave me very little money but you gave her a lot. ¿Te regalaron tus padres una moto el año pasado? - Did your parents buy you a bike last year? Note that although this is correct, it is unclear in the first example who you are referring to with "le", by omitting "a ella" (her) and "a tí" (you) there is no emphasis on "to whom" in either sentence. Using both types of pronoun in the sentence emphasises and clarifies exactly who you are referring to. Here are more examples: Me lo ha comprado a mí. - She bought it for me. Me lo ha comprado. - He bought it for me. Remember the pronouns with "a" reinforce, emphasise and clarify but they are not grammatically essential, whilst pronouns me, te, le, nos, os, les cannot be omitted. A mí me lo ha comprado. (correct) Me lo ha comprado a mí. (correct) A mí lo ha comprado. (incorrect) Lo ha comprado a mí. (incorrect) Named person In the cases where the person is named, e.g "a María..." the rule is slightly different. If the indirect object with "a + [name of person]" is placed: in front of the verb, then the other pronoun is needed, for example "A María le devolví los libros ayer." after the verb, then the repetition is not compulsory, for example "(Le) devolví los libros a María." More examples: A Cristina le pusieron una inyección en la pierna. (Le) pusieron una inyección en la pierna a Cristina. - They gave Cristina an injection in the leg. A Pedro y a Pablo les cantaron una canción por su despedida. (Les) cantaron una canción a Pedro y Pablo por su despedida. - They sang a goodbye song for Pedro and Pablo. Unnamed but known person When we don't name the person but say who we are talking about the same rule as above applies: A mis padres les ofrecieron un descuento del 50 por ciento. (Les) ofrecieron un descuento del 50 por ciento a mis padres. - They offered my parents a 50 percent discount. A su vecino le robaron la moto el otro día. (Le) robaron la moto el otro día a su vecino. - They stole his neighbour's bike the other day. One common mistake is forgetting the "a". For example: Ella le dieron una medalla. → A ella le dieron una medala.

Using double pronouns with El Imperativo

When an imperative in Spanish has two pronouns there is a specific order: first the indirect object pronoun (me, te, le, nos, os, les) and then the direct object pronoun (lo, la, las, los). These move after and combine with the verb to become a single word.Have a look at these examples: Prepara la carne para él. -> Prepárasela. - Prepare the meat for him. -> Prepare it for him. Cortad el cesped para mí. -> Cortádmelo. - Cut the grass for me. -> Cut it for me. Escribid la carta a nosotros. -> Escribídnosla. - Write the letter to us. -> Write it to us Pide las cervezas para ellos. -> Pídeselas. - Order the beers for them.-> Order them for them. Comprad caramelos para vosotros. -> Compráoslos. - Buy sweets for you. -> Buy them for you. Firmen el documento para ella. -> Fírmenselo. - Sign the document for her. -> Sign it for her. Arregla la falda para ti. -> Arréglatela. - Mend the skirt for you. -> Mend it for you. Notice: The combined verb with pronouns now has an accent [´] even if it didn't have one as a simple imperative with no pronouns, this is to maintain the pronunciation of the original verb. When le or les is combined with the direct object pronoun it becomes se. This is for pronunciation reasons. See Pronouns le / les become se when used with lo, la, los, las (indirect with direct pronouns).

Preposition "a" + Pronoun

When the preposition "a" is used with a pronoun, it is reinforcing the other indirect pronoun also present in the sentence. e.g Le dieron un regalo / Le dieron un regalo a ella. They gave her a present /They gave her a present Los profesores me han dado un certificado a mí. - The teachers have given a certificate to me. ¿A ti te afecta la crisis? - Does the crisis affect you? Le hemos explicado a ella el problema. - We have explained the problem to her.

Position of direct and indirect object pronouns with infinitive/gerund and affirmative commands

When there are direct and indirect object pronouns in a sentence with a conjugated verb that is followed by an infinitive or a gerund, the position of the pronouns can be: In front of the verb structure. ¿Todavía no has recibido la carta? Seguro que ella la va a escribir mañana. - Have you not received the letter yet? I am sure she'll write it tomorrow. ¿Estás cantando tu canción favorita? Sí, la estoy cantando. - Are you singing your favourite song? Yes, I am singing it. Right after the infinitive/gerund and connected to it. ¿Todavía no has recibido la carta? Seguro que ella va a escribirla mañana. - Have you not received the letter yet? I'm sure she'll write it tomorrow. ¿Estas cantando tu canción favorita? - Sí, estoy cantándola. - Are you singing your favorite song? - Yes, I'm singing it. Look at these other examples: Es el cumpleaños de Joaquín. Tengo que enviarle una tarjeta. - It is Joaquín's birthday. I have to send him a card. Es el cumpleaños de Joaquín. Le tengo que enviar una tarjeta.It is Joaquín's birthday. - I have to send him a card. Rafa y Luis son simpáticos. Quiero invitarlos a mi fiesta. - Rafa and Luis are nice. I want to invite them to my party. Rafa y Luis son simpáticos. Los quiero invitar a mi fiesta. - Rafa and Luis are nice. I want to invite them to my party. Affirmative commands When there are direct and indirect object pronouns in a sentence with an affirmative command the pronouns must be placed right after the command and connected to it. It cannot be placed in front. Read and listen to these examples: Los filetes están listos. ¡Cómanlos ahora mismo! - The steaks are ready. Eat them now! ¿Quieres que lleve los libros? -Sí, tráelos por favor. - Do you want me to take the books? -Yes, please bring them. ¡Dame las llaves! - Give me the keys! Muéstrale el camino. - Show him the way. Remember that there are sentences which have more than one object pronoun. In these cases, the indirect pronoun must be placed first, and the direct pronoun after, not the other way around. Both pronouns must be together Here are some more examples: Quiere comprárselos. - She wants to buy them for him. Se los quiere comprar. - She wants to buy them for him. ¡Cómpraselos! - Buy them for him!

Position of pronouns with conjugated verbs

When there are direct object, indirect object and reflexive pronouns in a sentence with a conjugated verb, the position of the pronouns will always be in front of the verb structure. Have a look and listen to the following examples: Ellos nos han enviado una invitación. - They have sent us an invitation. ¿Me leerás un cuento esta noche? - Will you read me a story tonight? Rosario lo compró en la farmacia. - Rosario bought it at the chemist. Ellas se habían duchado antes de salir. - They had had a shower before going out. Notice how the pronouns are always placed in front and not after the verb, unlike in English, for example: Los compré en Madrid NOT Compré los en Madrid I bought them in Madrid. With negative imperatives, the pronoun is also placed in front of the verb, after "no". For example: ¡No me dejes! - Don't leave me! No lo toques. Está muy caliente. - Don't touch it. It is very hot. Remember that in sentences with more than one pronoun there is a specific order you must follow: First the indirect object pronoun, then the direct object pronoun. This order must be respected in sentences with a conjugated verb. Ella se lo entregó enseguida. - She gave it to him straight away. [se =indirect object] [lo =direct object] Me gusta este bar. Clara me lo recomendó. - I like this bar. Clara recommended it to me. [me =indirect object] [lo =direct object] Hemos recibido una carta. Antonio nos la ha enviado desde Perú. - We received a letter. Antonio sent it to us from Peru. [nos =indirect object] [la =direct object] To learn about how pronouns are positioned with conjugated verbs that contain a gerund, infinitive or a command see also Position of direct and indirect object pronouns with infinitive/gerund and affirmative commands.

Conjugate in El Imperativo with reflexive pronouns (affirmative commands)

When using affirmative commands with reflexive verbs, you always place the pronoun after the commanding verb. ¡Levántate ahora mismo! - Get up right now! ("you" singular informal) ¡Ponte la camiseta! - Put your T-shirt on! ("you" singular informal) ¡Siéntese en el sofá! - Sit down on the sofa! ("you" singular formal) ¡Córtense el pelo en mi peluquería! - Have your hair cut at my hairdresser's! ("you" plural formal) Here are some important points to take into account when using reflexive verbs in El Imperativo: 1. The affirmative command of the 1st person plural (nosotros/nosotras) loses the -s of the -mos ending when the verb is reflexive. ¡Levantémonos temprano! - Let's get up early! ¡Vayámonos a la playa! - Let's go to the beach! 2. The affirmative command of the 2nd person plural (vosotros/vosotras) loses the -d of the commanding verb when the verb is reflexive. ¡Duchaos con agua fría! - Have a shower with cold water! ("you" plural informal) ¡Lavaos el pelo! - Wash your hair! ("you" plural informal) Exception: Note that verb ir (to go) has two different forms for the affirmative command of the 2nd person plural (vosotros/vosotras): iros idos When conjugating verbs with reflexive pronouns in El Imperativo you will often need to add an accent [ ´ ] in accordance with the Spanish rules for written accents.

Using the subjunctive with verbs that express "wish" and "feeling" (conditional in the main clause)

When we introduce a sentence with a verb that expresses a wish or a feeling, whether affirmative or negative, it is followed by the subjunctive. Let's see how it works when the verb in the main clause (expressing the wish or feeling) is conjugated in the conditional tense. For example: "Desearía que" (I [would] wish that...) "Me preocuparía que.../no me preocuparía que..." (I would/wouldn't worry that...) "Preferiría que..." (I'd prefer that...) "Me gustaría que.../no me gustaría que" (I would like that...) Desearía que todo pasara rápido y pudiéramos dejar esto atrás.I would like everything to go quickly and be able to leave this behind. ¿No le preocuparía que su hijo se quedara soltero para siempre?Wouldn't she worry that her son remained single forever? A ti no te gustaría que Ramiro te engañase.You wouldn't like Ramiro to cheat on you. Nosotros preferiríamos que fuésemos al restaurante del centro.We'd prefer if we all went to the restaurant in the centre. Me gustaría que ustedes vinieran a mi boda.I'd like you to come to my wedding. In all the examples above, what is wished for or felt is that something happens or does not happen in the future or at the moment of speaking. This is always expressed with El Imperfecto Subjuntivo. Note that if the subject in the main clause and the subordinate clause is the same, then we omit que and use the infinitive. For example: A mí me preocuparía tener que seguir trabajando a los 70 años.I'd worry if I had to continue working when I'm 70 years old. Te entristecería ver a tus hijos sin trabajo durante mucho tiempo.You would be sad to see your children out of work for a long time. Bear in mind that wish and feeling verbs sometimes take "si" instead of "que", but the usage is the same. For example: Me encantaría si pudieses venir conmigo.I'd love it if you could come with me. [you=tú] Te pondrías muy triste si me vieras sufrir.You would become sad if you saw me suffer.

Using the subjunctive with verbs that express "wish" and "feeling"

When we introduce a sentence with a verb that expresses a wish or a feeling, whether affirmative or negative, it is followed by the subjunctive. For example: "deseo que" (I wish that...) "me preocupa que..." (I worry that...) "prefiero que..." (I prefer that...) Let's see some examples expressing "wish": Yo prefiero que Belén estudie arquitectura. - I prefer Belén to study architecture. Te deseo que seas muy feliz en el futuro. - I wish you happiness for the future. Ella no quiere que sus padres se separen. - She doesn't want her parents to separate. Let's see some examples expressing "feeling": No me apetece que vengáis a visitarme. - I don't feel like having you come visit me. A Carmen le gusta que Marcos se muestre simpático con su familia. - Carmen likes that Marcos acts friendly with her family. Me alegra mucho que Miguel haya conseguido un trabajo nuevo. - I am really glad that Miguel has got a new job. Here are some more common "wish" or "feeling" phrases which apply this rule: Me gusta que... (I like that...) No me gusta que... (I don't like that...) Me alegra que... (It makes me happy that...) No me molesta que... (It doesn't bother me that...) Me da igual que... (I don't care if...) No me importa que... (I don't mind if...) Me encanta que... (I love that...) Have a look and listen to these examples: A Gerardo no le molesta que yo ponga la música alta. - It doesn't bother Gerardo that I play music loudly. A mis amigos no les importa que yo use su ordenador. - My friends don't mind me using their computer. No nos importa que vosotros no queráis vernos más. - We don't care if you don't want to see us again. Important: Notice how in all the sentences above the subject of the introductory phrase is not the same as the one in the subordinate phrase: Te deseo que seas muy feliz en el futuro. deseo = I wish / seas = you are This condition must be met in order to use the subjunctive in sentences that express "wish" and "feeling". However, if the subject is the same in the main and subordinate clause, we would use the infinitive (-ar, -er, -ir form) instead: For example: Deseo ser feliz en el futuro. Notice there is no "que" in this case. I wish to be happy in the future. (=I wish that I am happy in the future.)

Using the subjunctive with negative opinion phrases

When we introduce a sentence with an affirmative opinion phrase, like creo que, opino que, pienso que..., me parece que..., it is followed by the indicative: Yo creo que Marta tiene celos. I think Marta is jealous. Pienso que el alcalde debería tener un salario más bajo.I think the mayor should have a lower salary. A mi me parece que la fruta es muy cara en esta tienda.I think the fruit is very expensive in this shop. However, if we make the sentences above negative we use the subjunctive rather than the indicative: Yo no creo que María sea celosa.I don't think María is jealous. A mí no me parece que la fruta sea muy cara en esta tienda.I don't think the fruit is very expensive in this shop. Here are some more common opinion phrases where this rule applies: Opino que... My opinion is... / I think that... Considero que... I consider that... Sospecho que... I suspect that... Have a look and listen to these examples: Nosotros no opinamos que el jefe tenga razón. We do not think that the boss is right. Mi madre no piensa que yo vaya a terminar el curso de fotografía.My mother does not think I will be able to finish the photography course. Mi marido no considera que los niños estén malcriados.My husband does not think that the children are spoilt. Fernando no sospecha que su mujer le haya sido infiel siempre.Fernando does not suspect that his wife has always been unfaithful. Notice that when the negative opinion phrase is in the present tense, the sentence after "que" can be expressed in any subjunctive tense. We can express an opinion about something happening in the present, past or future: No creo que Susana venga hoy. (I don't think Susana will come today.) No creo que Susana vaya a venir hoy. (I don't think Susana is going to come today.) No creo que Susana haya venido hoy. (I don't think Susana came today.) No creo que Susana viniera hoy. (I don't think Susana came today.) No creo que Susana hubiera venido hoy. (I don't think Susana would have come today.)

Using El Imperfecto de Subjuntivo with verbs giving advice/order (sugerir, recomendar, prohibir)

When we use a verb that is giving either advice or an order in El Presente or El Presente Progresivo, it is followed by El Presente de Subjuntivo. To learn about this see Using El Presente de Subjuntivo with verbs giving advice / order (sugerir, recomendar, prohibir) This lesson explains how to use these same verbs in El Pretérito Indefinido, El Pretérito Imperfecto and El Pretérito Pluscuamperfecto, which are then followed by que + El Imperfecto Subjuntivo sugerir (to suggest) recomendar (to recommend) advertir (to warn/to advise) animar [a] (to encourage) aconsejar (to advise) prohibir (to ban) ordenar (to order) permitir (to allow) necesitar (to need) Let's see some examples: Me sugirió que llegara temprano a la citad - He suggested that I arrive early to the appointment. Le prohibieron que visitara a sus hijos. - They forbade him to visit his children. Nos advirtieron que hiciéramos la reserva con antelación. - They advised us to make the reservation in advance. Me habían recomendado que lo consultase con un abogado. - They had recommended that I consult a lawyer about it. Paula me animó a que fuese de excursión a la montaña. - Paula encouraged me to go on an excursion to the mountains. María me aconsejaba que tuviera un poco de paciencia con Miguel.Maria advised me to be a bit patient with Miguel. Yo había ordenado a mi hijo que arreglara su habitación inmediatamente.I had ordered my son to tidy up his room immediately. No nos permitieron que comiésemos en la reunión. They didn't allow us to eat during the meeting. Necesitaba que vinieras a recogerme al aeropuerto.I needed you to come and pick me up from the airport. Notice how most of them have a direct or indirect object indicating the person receiving the order, request, suggestion or encouragement (me, te, nos, le...) Note that, as explained in Using El Presente de Subjuntivo with verbs giving advice / order (sugerir, recomendar, prohibir), the use of the present tense and present progressive for verbs giving advice or an order requires the use of the present subjunctive in the subordinate clause after que. However the use of past tenses with this type of verb triggers the imperfect subjunctive in the subordinate clause: Te sugiero que vengas rápidamente. I suggest that you come quickly. Te sugerí que vinieras/vinieses rápidamente. I suggested that you come quickly. Also notice that in English, the subordinate clause doesn't change tenses. (that you come quickly) Sometimes verbs giving advice / an order can be followed by an infinitive. In this case, "que" shouldn't be used. For example: Pedro nos animó a ir a su fiesta.Pedro encouraged us to go to his party. El médico me sugirió hacer un curso de meditación.The doctor suggested that I do [lit: suggested to me to do] a meditation course. Sus padres le prohibían beber alcohol.His parents forbade him to drink alcohol. This would be incorrect: Pedro nos animó a que ir a su fiesta. El médico me sugirió que hacer un curso de meditación. Sus padres le prohibían que beber alcohol. Using these verbs with El Pretérito Perfecto gives more flexibility to the subordinate clause. In this case it allows both El Presente de Subjuntivo and El Imperfecto Subjuntivo. Have a look: Nos han prohibido que entremos en esta clase.They have forbidden us to go in this classroom. Nos han prohibido que entráramos en esta clase.They have forbidden us to go into this classroom.

Using estar (not ser) + preposition a with fluctuating quantities and prices

When we use the preposition a in order to talk about fluctuating quantities and prices, we need to use the verb estar (not ser).Read and listen to these examples: La libra estará a 1.14 euros. - The pound will be worth €1.14. Un kilo de queso está a 15 euros. - A kilo of cheese costs 15 euros. El dólar estaba a 0.75 libras. - The dollar was worth £0.75.

Use of preposition a with verbs ir, salir, venir

When we use the verbs ir, salir, and venir followed by the preposition a, we are expressing a purpose, the same way we use the preposition "para." For example: Fui a su casa para hablar con él. - I went to his house to talk to him. Here, we could have used the preposition "a" with the same intention: Fui a su casa a hablar con él. - I went to his house to talk to him. This is possible because the verb "ir" implies movement, the same way salir and venir do. Here are more examples: Salimos a tomar un poco el aire. - We went out to get a bit of fresh air. Javier no está en casa. Ha salido a correr un rato. - Javier is not home. He went out to run for a bit. Vengo a hablar con el Señor Ramírez. Tengo una cita. - I've come to speak with Mr. Ramírez. I have an appointment. Tú solo has venido a empeorar la situación. - You only came to worsen the situation. Using "a" is not correct in this context if the verb is a static verb, not implying movement. For example: Estoy aquí para verte. (I am here to see you.) no movement - it doesn't allow "a" He venido para/a verte. (I came to see you.) movement - it allows "a" It can also be followed by "a que" to form a subordinate clause, using the subjunctive: He ido al médico a que me mirara la garganta. - I've been to the doctor to have my throat looked at. Sal fuera a que te dé un poco el aire. - Go out so that you get some fresh air. Vaya usted a la oficina a que le firmen ese documento. - Go to the office to get that document signed (for you). The sentences above also allow "para que" with the same meaning. Using "a" instead of "para" is more natural and slightly more colloquial.

Using tan ... como = as ... as (comparatives with adjectives and adverbs)

When we want to express that something has the same qualities as another thing, for example Paul is as tall as John, in Spanish we use tan ... como. Use tan ... como with adjectives/adverbs Adjectives: El libro es tan bueno como la serie. - The book is as good as the series. Las mariposas son tan bonitas como las libélulas. - Butterflies are as pretty as dragonflies. La paella es tan sabrosa como la fabada. - The paella is as tasty as the fabada [bean and pork stew]. El esmoquin es tan elegante como el frac. - The tuxedo is as elegant as the morning suit. Note: as always, adjectives need to agree in number and gender with the noun they describe. Adverbs: Miguel come tan lentamente como Laura. - Miguel eats as slowly as Laura. Mi coche corre tan rápidamente como el tuyo. - My car runs as quickly as yours. Juan vive tan felizmente como María. - Juan lives as happily as María.

Verbs ver, oír, escuchar + infinitive/gerund

With the infinitive When we want to express "to see/hear/listen to someone do something", the verbs of perception ver, oír and escuchar can be followed by an infinitive. By using the infinitive we perceive this action as completed and not as an action in progress. If the infinitive is intransitive (i.e. it has no direct object) then this is the natural order of the sentence: Ver / oír / escuchar (conjugated) + infinitive + a [person] For example: Vi llegar a Marta. - I saw Marta arrive. Vi + llegar + a Marta If there is extra information after the infinitive, making it a longer sentence, then the order tends to change to: Ver, oír, escuchar (conjugated) + a [person] + infinitive + extra info Vi a Marta llegar muy asustada a la casa. - I saw Marta arrive home very frightened. Vi + a Marta + llegar + muy asustada a la casa Bear in mind that, if the sentence uses a pronoun to refer to the person that is seen, heard or listened to, this pronoun is a direct object pronoun. The placement of the pronoun is always before the conjugated verb: I saw Marta arrive = I saw her arrive La vi llegar. I saw her arrive. La + vi + llegar We cannot place the direct object pronoun referring to the person who is seen, heard or listened to anywhere else in the sentence. If the direct object is referring to "singular male", we can use "lo" or "le". Remember that the use of le as a direct object is accepted if it refers to singular male (but not female nor any plural) I saw Antonio arrive = I saw him arrive Lo vi llegar.I saw him arrive. Le vi llegar.I saw him arrive. Lo and le are both correct for "him". If the infinitive is a transitive verb (it has a direct object) this is the natural order of the sentence: Ver, oír, escuchar (conjugated) + a [person] + infinitive + direct object or Le/lo/la/los/ + ver, oír, escuchar (conjugated) + infinitive + direct object For example: He oído a mi hermano decir palabrotas.I heard my brother say some swear words. Lo he oído decirlas.I heard him say them. Le he oído decirlas.I heard him say them. La he oído decirlas.I heard her say them. Los he oído decirlas.I heard them say them. With the gerund The verbs of perception ver, oír and escuchar can be followed by a gerund to express "to see/hear someone doing something". When we use the gerund instead of the infinitive we express and put the focus on the progress of the action. Look at these examples: Vi a Miguel tomando unas cervezas con sus amigos.I saw Miguel having some beers with his friends. Lo vi tomando unas cervezas.I saw him having some beers. When using the structure with the gerund sometimes the subject of the action may be ambiguous, for example: La escuché cantando en la ducha.I heard her singing in the shower. [OR] I was singing in the shower when I heard her. Here, it is not clear who was doing the singing. The person I heard singing could be the person in the shower or it could be "me". The natural order to follow with the structure using the gerund is also: Ver, oír, escuchar (conjugated) + a [person] + gerund + extra info or Le/lo/la/los/ + ver, oír, escuchar (conjugated) + gerund + direct object/extra info If it is a short sentence, the gerund can also be placed in front of the person doing the action expressed by the gerund: Vi bailando a Miguel.I saw Miguel dancing. Vi a Miguel bailando.I saw Miguel dancing. But if this sentence had extra information, then we tend to mention the person before the action: Vi a Miguel bailando en la discoteca con unos amigos.I saw Miguel dancing at the disco with some friends. Remember: The difference between using the infinitive or the gerund: the infinitive refers to an action that is seen or heard as "complete" the gerund indicates an action "in progress" He visto a Carlos fumar. I saw Carlos smoke. (complete action) He visto a Carlos fumando.I saw Carlos smoking. (action in progress)

Subjunctive present first person conducir:

Yo conduzca

Dormir subjunctive first person

Yo duerma

Difference between tú, tu, te, ti

a subject pronoun and refers to the subject of the sentence. It corresponds to the English "you" (second person, singular fam). In most cases, the subject pronoun is optional in Spanish and usually not used. (Tú) eres muy inteligente - You are very intelligent Tu: - This is a possessive adjective and is used to demonstrate possession, ownership or relationship of a noun. It corresponds to the English possessive adjective, "your." Te: - This is an indirect object pronoun (in the case of your example above, but also shares the same form as direct object pronoun) and is used to name the object of a sentence. In this case: Te gusta jugar baloncesto - You like basketball). Ti This is what is called a disjunctional or prepositional pronoun. Ti also means you but is only used in prepositional phrases. Ej. En ti no puedo confiar. - I can't trust you. (Literally: In you I can not trust.) Ej. Te doy a ti un regalo. - I'm giving you a present (Literally: I give to you a present.)

Difference between aún and aun (with and without a written accent)

aún = still / yet / nonetheless; even (as an intensifier) aun = even / despite Some Spanish words have different meanings when written with or without an accent. It is necessary to pay special attention to aún and aun and what they mean each time: Aún with a written accent Aún is an adverb. It is usually translated as still, yet, however. Aún is used when: it refers to time. For example: Aún tengo muy buenos recuerdos de ese viaje. - I still have very good memories of that trip. Mi hermano no ha llegado aún de Barcelona. - My brother hasn't arrived yet from Barcelona. ¿Aún estás aquí? - Are you still here? (You = tú) However, the synonym "todavía" is more common in this context. Aún no he ido al médico. = Todavía no he ido al médico. - I haven't been to the doctor yet. Aún me duele la cabeza. = Todavía me duele la cabeza. - My head still hurts. it is the equivalent of "nonetheless/yet" (aún = sin embargo/no obstante) Mateo le permitió quedarse con la casa y el coche pero ella aún se quejó. - Mateo allowed her to keep the house and the car but she nonetheless complained. Te llamo a todas horas y aún dices que no te hago caso. - I call you all the time [and] yet you say I don't pay attention to you. This usage of aún is a lot less common than sin embargo or no obstante. - Te llamo a todas horas y sin embargo/no obstante dices que no te hago caso. It is an intensifier, used with más, menos, mejor, peor Le ofrecieron más dinero aún que en el antiguo trabajo. - They offered him even more money than in his old job. Esa casa no es muy cara pero esta es aún más barata. - That house is not very expensive but this one is even cheaper/cheaper still. -¿Está mejor tu padre? -No, está aún peor. -Is your father better? -No, he is even worse/worse still. Note that in this case, as an intensifier, we are not using the general translations stated above for aún. Instead, we are translating it here as "even ...." But in these cases, although it may sound a bit old-fashioned, you could also use "still"; for example: Esa casa no es muy cara pero esta es aún más barata. - That house is not very expensive but this one is even cheaper/cheaper still. Aun without a written accent: Aun is also an adverb. It's usually translated as even or despite. For example: No iré contigo aun si me lo suplicas. - I won't go with you even if you beg me. Aun con ventaja, no ganaron el partido. - Even with an advantage, they did not win the match. Me parece muy caro aun con el descuento del 30 por ciento. - I think it is very expensive, even with the 30 percent discount. Aun si es verdad no lo aceptarán. - Even if it is true, they will not accept it. Aun is very often used with cuando / con / si: aun cuando... = even when... aun con... = even with... aun si = even if... Aun is slightly formal; it's a bit more colloquial to use the adverb "incluso" in these cases. For example: Aun con ventaja, no ganaron el partido = Incluso con ventaja, no ganaron el partido - Even with an advantage, they didn't win the match. Aun así vs aún así: Aun así and aún así are both correct, but they mean different things. Aun así (aun without an accent) means even so, despite that. Aún así (aún with a written accent) is a combination of aún (still) and así (like that/that way) For example: La he tratado como una reina y aun así no quiere ser mi novia. - I have treated her like a queen and even so/despite that, she doesn't want to be my girlfriend. Me pagarán poco dinero, pero, aun así, aceptaré el trabajo. - They won't pay me a lot of money, but, despite that, I will accept the job. Aún así (aún with a written accent) is a combination of aún (still) and así (like that/that way) For example: Tenemos que irnos ya y tú estás aún así, sin vestir ni maquillar. - We need to go now and you are still like that, undressed and with no make-up.

Subjunctive present first person coger:

coja (regular in subjunctive)

as long as, provided that

con tal de que (+ subj.)

haber, subjunctive first person

haya

Se aspectual: Ejemplos específicos

ir vs irse: When we use irse, instead of just ir, we perceive the action differently: the meaning of the verb irse is more intense/complete. With irse, we are implying more than just the action of "going" or "going somewhere"; for example: Cristina fue a Mallorca. - Cristina went to Mallorca. Cristina se fue a Mallorca. - Cristina went off to Mallorca. In the first example, the focus is on the destination (the most important part is where she went). In the second example with the se aspectual, the focus is on the action of leaving more than the destination - there is more implicit information: the listener understands that she left and headed to Mallorca. creer algo vs creerse algo There is a similar effect as between ir and irse. Have a look at the following examples: No creas sus mentiras. - Don't believe his lies. No te creas sus mentiras. - Don't believe his lies at all. [don't be so naive] morir vs morirse: There is a tendency to use morir when it's more impersonal, objective, with little emotional involvement from the speaker. It is also far more common to use morir in written Spanish. El paciente murió de neumonía. - The patient died of pneumonia. Tristemente, en el accidente de ayer murieron 3 personas. - Sadly, in yesterday's accident 3 people died. In spoken Spanish, it is much more frequent to use morirse when the speaker is showing personal affection. In addition, it refers to the "process" of dying: El médico me ha dicho que mi padre se está muriendo. - The doctor told me that my dad is dying. Estoy muy afligida porque mi perro se murió hace unos días. - I am very sad because my dog died a few days ago. Tengo que darte una mala noticia; Dolores se ha muerto. - I have sad news for you: Dolores has died. pasar vs pasarse: If we use pasarse, we indicate that the subject is more involved in the action; for example: Pasó un mes en Canadá con su familia. - He spent a month in Canada with his family. Se pasó un mes en Canadá con su familia. - He spent a month in Canada with his family. He pasado un día entero escribiendo esta redacción. - I spent a whole day writing this essay. Me he pasado un día entero escribiendo esta redacción. - I spent a whole day writing this essay. The examples with the se aspectual indicate more involvement, while without it, the subject is more detached from the action. The se aspectual does not work with all Spanish verbs! Sometimes students overuse it after receiving a very vague general explanation about using se with verbs simply to add emphasis

Subjunctive present first person llover:

llueva (regular in subjunctive)

How to structure irregular superlatives

mejor /mejores (best) peor /peores (worse/worst) mayor /mayores (biggest/oldest) menor /menores (smallest/youngest) e.g Para mí, el año 2000 fue el peor año de mi vida. - For me, the year 2000 was the worst year of my life. Esa es la peor universidad de la región. - That is the worst university of the region. Ya han pasado los peores meses. - The worst months have passed. Las peores lluvias vendrán en febrero. - The worst rainfalls will come in February. La mayor satisfacción para nosotros es estar con los nietos. - The greatest satisfaction for us is to be with our grandchildren. Ben y Danny son los mayores. - Ben and Danny are the oldest. Lisa y Sandra son las mayores. - Lisa and Sandra are the oldest. Aurelio era el menor de los hijos. - Aurelio was the youngest of the children. Eva tiene 12 años pero Laura tiene 8. Ella es la menor. -Eva is 12 years old but Laura is 8. David y Ricardo son los menores de la familia. - David and Ricardo are the youngest in the family. Bear in mind that their regular superlative forms can also be used: el/la/los/las + más/menos + bueno/-a/-os/-as = mejor/mejores el/la/los/las + más/menos + malo/-a/-os/-as= peor/peores el/la/los/las+ más/menos + grande/-s or viejo/-a/-os/-as = mayor/mayores el/la/los/las+ más/menos + pequeño/-a/-os/-as = menor/menores

Using poder in El pretérito Perfecto and El Pretérito Indefinido for "could" in past actions

n Spanish, the modal verb poder can be used in El Pretérito Perfecto or El Pretérito Indefinido when someone could/couldn't/was/was not able to do something in the past. We will use: Poder in El Pretérito Perfecto + Infinitivo OR Poder in El Pretérito Indefinido + Infinitivo Both tenses refer to a past action of poder. Have a look at some examples: Ellos han podido volver temprano. - They were able to come back early. Hemos podido pintar la casa y decorarla. - We could/were able to paint the house and decorate it. Mi inquilino no ha podido pagar la renta este mes. - My tenant wasn't able to pay the rent this month. No he podido ir a muchas fiestas en los últimos meses. - I haven't been able to go to many parties in the last few months. ¿Pudiste contactar con tu abogado? - Could you (Were you able to) get in touch with your lawyer? El fontanero no pudo arreglar el grifo. - The plumber wasn't able to mend the tap. ¿Vosotras pudisteis reservar ese hotel tan barato?Were you able to book that cheap hotel? The tense to use depends on how we see the time frame in which the action happens. As a general rule, to use El Pretérito Perfecto: we are not referring to a specific moment in the past and the time when it happened is not relevant or it refers to actions in the past where the speaker sees him/herself inside that same time frame. For example: ¿Has podido comprar fruta? -No, no he podido. - Were you able to buy some fruit? -No, I wasn't able to. Esther ha podido reservar una mesa esta mañana. - Esther was able to book a table this morning. In the first example above, the specific time when it happens is not relevant and is not mentioned. In the second example the time phrase "esta mañana" is used and the speaker sees himself inside that time phrase, therefore El Pretérito Perfecto is used. As a general rule, to use El Pretérito Indefinido: we are referring to a specific moment in the past and the time when it happened is relevant or it refers to actions in the past where the speaker sees him/herself outside that time frame. For example: Perdona, no pude llamarte ayer. - Sorry, I couldn't call you yesterday. Ella pudo recuperar su dinero al final. - She could (was able to) get her money back in the end. No pudimos conseguir entradas para el concierto. - We couldn't get tickets for the concert. Remember though that the presence of a time frame is not always necessary with these tenses. Take this example: ¿Pudiste contactar con tu abogado? - Could you (Were you able to) get in touch with your lawyer? There is no specific time frame here but the speaker uses El Pretérito Indefinido because the time frame is obvious to him/her as it has been mentioned before, so there is no need to repeat it. Notice how in all the examples poder is followed by Infinitivo.

Use of indirect pronouns with direct pronouns

when the indirect pronouns le and les (meaning to him / to her / to them) are accompanied by the direct pronoun lo, la, los or las Laura se lo compró. Laura bought it for her. - Would have been Laura la lo compró otherwise

Tener conjugation in El Futuro Simple

yo tendré tú tendrás él / ella / Ud. tendrá nosotros / nosotras tendremos vosotros / vosotras tendréis ellos / ellas / Uds. tendrán

Preposition 'sin' + Pronoun

¡Fuisteis a la fiesta sin mí! - You went to the party without me! No sé qué hacer sin ti. - I don't know what to do without you. Sin ellas no podemos continuar la clase. - Without them we cannot continue with the class.

Preposition 'en' + Pronoun

¿Tú crees en mí? - Do you believe in me? Confiamos en ti para el éxito del proyecto. - We have confidence in you for the success of the project. Tenemos dos hijos y nos concentramos mucho en ellos. -We have two sons and we focus a lot on them.